Home

Ektron CMS300 User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

1. right 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site ormation in the sample site is fictional gt lt TitlesAdding Metadata to a New Content Block lt Title gt TT s SE olen ment content metadata gt opyright 2002 Ektron lt link rel stylesheet href default css type text css gt lt HEAD gt lt BODY topmargin O leftmargin 0 marginheight 0 marginwidth 0 rightmargin 0 bottommargin 0 gt lt TABLE WIDTH 100 BORDER 0 CELLPADDING 0 CELLSPACING 0 backgr ound graphics header_back gif gt lt TR gt lt TD gt lt IMG SRC qraphics header gif gt lt TD gt lt header graphic note photoshop fileCheader psd included to change company name gt H Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 71 Adding or Editing Search Data e Keywords are searched by leading search programs along with the page s title After a content block is published to the Web site you can view the page source to see its search data Below is the source of a sample Web page Velcome to RC International Microsoft Internet Explorer View Favorites Tools Help index 1 Notepad File Edit Format View Help lt Copyright 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site All information in the sample site is fictional gt html gt EkTitle gt welcome to RC International lt Tit le gt lt meta name Keywords content RC International RC racing remote control
2. c scccceeeseeseenseeseenees 309 Spell Checking Selected Text ccecccccccsseseeceeeseeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeas 310 Setting Spell Check Options cccccsssssescesseeceeseesenseneennees 311 Editing in MicroSoft WOlrd c sccceeseseeseeseseeeeeeeeseeneeeeees 313 See Also Uploading an Image in a Microsoft Word Document 314 Editing XML DOCUNIEIINS ssinsssacereicarccvenscccensnssnanseenntcareseorebsnccene 314 Inserting WAGES wiv issctsnstancedacnstscnvicanniacssieasavevevanaieiercawaxeeiedens 316 Using the First Picture Properties Dialog BoX 0000 317 Inserting a Picture from the Servel ccccceseececeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeens 318 Inserting a Picture from Your Computer cceccceeeseseeeeeeeeeees 319 Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box 321 709 Sie ate ee lg IE gt ee eae eee cee nest we oe ee one eee ae 322 AEE ae ss ceases E ee 323 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 vi SI IN ratteasasietania te euind peal a a 324 Aligning th FUG icccsceccasaaincirana taneaalnciianinaenioscnictimaluddaaaamsscketsteiseaienaons 325 Resetting Width Height Border Thickness and Alignment 326 Adding Space around the Picture cccccsseeceeeeeeseeeeeeeseeeseeeees 327 Editing tne Ficiure S TIIG sisosiitarisincnsiannonniiainka annat 328 The Options Button en00aanneneennnnnnennnnnnnrnnnnnnsrnrnronenrrrrrnnnnrrenne 328 Mov
3. For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only it Upload Files Upload any external files Such as images to Moving an Image to the server the Server on page 329 Upload the content currently in the editor to Content Upload n the server the eWebEditPro Developer s Reference Guide Upload Content Switches to Data Design Mode Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode on page 1 9 f Data Design Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature Switches to Data Entry Mode Design Mode vs Data Entry Mode on page 1 9 a Data Entry Mode Button only appears when eWebEditPro XML configuration enables the Data Designer feature E y Display the page content as WYSIWYG TEO What You See Is What You Get WYSIWYG is the ability to see in the editor what will appear when user views the Web page Display the page content as HTML Viewing and Editing lt 3 y View as HTML HTML on page 419 i2 Begin the line on which the cursor rests with a Number number If the line above this line is e not numbered assign this line 1 e numbered assign a number one more than the line above Bullet Begin the line on which the cursor rests or all a selected lines with a bullet Increase or decrease the current line s distance from the left margin Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 280 Too
4. lf you are ready to publish your Web content and want to display the image click Update Now If you plan to add more content later you can click Upload Later and upload all images at that time Editing XML Documents If your organization has implemented eWebEditPro XML you cannot edit XML documents using Microsoft Word This is because Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 314 Editing in Microsoft Word Word does not support XML editing If a full XML document is loaded the Word button el is disabled lf a Word document includes some custom XML tags the following dialog appears warning you about the problem Edit in ford WARNING This content contains tags that Microsoft Word may not recognize Microsott Word may corupt the content introduce invalid tags or may not display it at all Do you want to continue You can proceed and edit using Word or decide not to edit using Word Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 315 Inserting Images To insert a picture into the editor place the cursor where you las When you click the button one of the two Picture Properties dialog boxes illustrated below appears depending on how your Webmaster has set up your system The dialog boxes are very similar with the only difference being that the Select Server File button only appears on the second dialog box The Select Server File button appears if your upload mechanism is set to
5. Assigned By Alphabetically by user who assigned the task Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 229 Managing Tasks Editing a Task You can change task information such as e Title e Assigned to e Language e Content e Priority e Task Category e Task Type e Status State e Due Date e Start Date e Description To edit a task perform the following steps 1 Access the view task page for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 224 Click the Edit button L The Edit Task screen appears Edit the task Click the Update button fe to save the changes 7 e eS p Adding Comments to Tasks You can add comments to an assigned task if you want to provide additional information about its status For example if you update a task s status from n progress to Waiting on Someone Else you can use a comment to describe the status change such as left voice mail with John with questions about his changes to the home page Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 230 Managing Tasks Comments appear at the bottom of the View Tasks screen Illustrated below Se I Task Title Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To f admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Mot Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content blocks on the list Add
6. Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 82 Approving Declining Content Blocks At the approval window the Sports Editor has several options Send content to next approver in aoproval chain Approve Ea i a 1 Send email to creator notifying him her that Decline i content was declined 2 Remove content from approval chain Invokes the editor The approver can make changes to content block For demonstration purposes we ll choose Approve Second Approver After the content block is approved the next approver in the approval chain receives an email saying that the content block is ready for approval Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 83 Approving Declining Content Blocks Request for content approval Ble Edt vew Tools Message Help G gt a X B From Webmaster yourcompany com Dabe Friday May 03 2002 4 19 PM To EditorInChieh our domain com Subject Request for content aporoval The content Red Sox Win World Seres has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submutted content block on the Web site http 192 168 0 156 CMS200Samplefndes asp 7id 17 Please Mote You must loan and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor Edit
7. Every 4th of every Month Every first Tue of every Month Epd 1 00 00 PM Yearly every 4th of 4pr Yearly every first Tue of Apr If Display the times for the event Hyperlink l Make the Hyperlink active Launch link in a new browser Root Folder News Folder Path earketing News L EC International Announces the RC Cheetah L EC International Hosts RC Conference E EC International Ships RC Sportster 4 Update the fields using the table described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 as a reference 5 Click the Save button E Editing Recurring Events After a recurring series of events is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location hyperlink and event type Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 210 Working with Calendars NOTE You cannot edit event dates or times To change those delete and re enter the series of events To edit a recurring series of events follow the steps in Editing a Single Event on page 209 The only difference is the Update all recurring events associated with this event box To apply the edits to only the instance of the event that you selected uncheck the box To apply the changes to all instances check the box Deleting Calendar Events The section explains how to delete a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only delete a calendar event if you have add edit or delete permission for the conten
8. cccccsssessssseesesseeceeneessenseesenneeses 208 Editing Calendar Events ccsssscsssssecesseeeceeseeseenseeseeneeseees 209 Deleting Calendar EVeNts ccsssssseeccesseeeseessseeseenseeseees 211 Managing TASK S saug rS 213 Creating a Task via the Task Folder sccssssseessseeeneeeeees 214 Accessing the Tasks FOICGL cccccsseceeeeseseeecesseeeseeeeeesseeeeeeas 214 Creating the Task via the Task Folder cccccseseeceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeas 215 Adding a Task Category and Task Type cccccseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 220 Creating a Task via a Content BIOCK ccssseceeseeeeeeneeeeeens 224 MWC A TASK cscs tcc tnncaenceacnccssesuandiesnecnvecnteesacesateucontcarcicnaes 224 Task View Be e q germane eee eee reer fr meen nr peer ear ren eee r enn canteen terres 225 Sorting Tasks By Task Tye viiccrsssesascsoresyeeyennpnempaaerdsseseasmpeeeesenss 228 COMI Tasks By COLUMN sassate 229 CANNE A ToS E o T are merie 230 Adding Comments to TaskS sccsssssessesseeeeeneeseesseeseeseeses 230 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 iv Daling a Wil eee eer eee ee se eee tee aaa 233 Viewing a Task s History cccccsesecsssesessecessessseoeseeeseoeneneaeeens 234 Task Module Toolbar cccscceseccesecsseecnseenseeeseeseneeeeeesoaes 235 Using the Asset Management System 0 00 236 Supported Types of ASSeUtS ccccssseecsess
9. on page 354 Zoom Out Gy Standard Toolbar Button Decrease an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to decrease magnification See Also Zoom In on page 363 Reset Zoom Ratio on page 354 specifying Color Depth To specify an image s color depth that is the number of colors available to an image specify a bit depth The color depth is derived from the bit depth Here are the bit depth values Bit depth Color depth 16 colors 2 colors Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 363 Editing Images Bit depth Color depth 16M colors 256 colors Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 364 Introduction to Tables Sometimes the information on your Web page looks better when displayed on a table Here is an example Baseball Team Hockey Team Yankees Mets Rangers White Sox Cubs Black Hawks This section explains e Creating a Table e Deleting a Table e Inserting a Table within a Table See Also Table Dialog Boxes and Menus on page 369 Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 376 Working with Table Cells on page 391 and Section 508 Tables on page 425 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 365 Introduction to Tables Creating a Table To create a table click the table button then click Insert Table from the menu When you do the Insert Table dialog box appears
10. Asset OS rape si tasitansinasnccenencaascierninereinsnnandsieamenandoraivensleaaeenhe 260 Using the CMS AMS Search scseeesssseeeesceeseeeseeeneenees 261 Updating Your User Profile cccsseceseseneeeeeeeeneees 262 Accessing Online Help ccsseeeseeceseesseeeesesenesenees 267 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML ccccceseeeeeeeees 270 USING eWebEditPro XML cccscsscsessesesssesesecsensssessrsesersesseseseesenseseseesees 271 Organization of this Documentation cccsssseeseeseeeeeeees 271 Creating a Simple Web Page csssscceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeees 272 Your Finished Web Page scccsssecsssssescenseeseeseeseeeseesensees 272 Creating the Sample Web Page ccccssssseessesesseeseeneeeeenens 273 ToOlDar BUTONG nersini EREE 276 PINAY TEK erecta ptenapapcasaacatectdcsinwancaaasasnapeanensesmumeeimaumincicakas 276 Applying Formatting Attributes to Text scseseseeeeeees 277 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 V Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists 277 Position Objects Options wsscicornnisiensdsconstinteaventiudicnesenntatenssenkeit ieee 283 Text Direccion OS coe ceaciconciaceplpceacecna nea 283 Fom Elements TOODA asresten EERE RINEN T 284 Buttons of the Form Elements Toolbar cciesisisiuicadscetatebseisapesceiasieiars 286 Customizing Your Toolbar c ccccssecesseeceseeeesesenee
11. C Not Specified f Percent i Pixels Horizontal Alignment center Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 383 Manipulating Your Table s Format Table Backgrounds You can specify a background color or image for your table Specifying a Table s Background Color You can assign a background color to a table to make it more pleasing to the eye Here is an example NOTE If you apply a dark background color to a table you may want to apply a light foreground color to the text Use the font color button A to change the text color To assign a background color to your table click the Background Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background EO PEDERE ee tT eT BP PPB Background Color IY Unassigned When you click that field a color dialog box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the background of the table Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 384 Manipulating Your Table s Format 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Basic colors ml Mi el i ne Eee ADETE E ee f ADE E E E g g BEER Eee _ SSS Sine ie Custom colors EEE EEE BEE EEE A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Deleting
12. Modified Path Folder location of content block in Ektron CMS300 Web site After selecting content blocks check them in using the Checkin button Eg New Content Report The New Content report displays content blocks in a new state that is they were created and saved but never published The new content report contains the following information Title of content block ID number assigned to content block by Ektron CMS300 Last Editor Last user to edit the content block Date Date and time content block was last edited Modified Folder location of content block in Ektron CMS300 Web site Submitted Report The Submitted Content report displays all content blocks in a submitted state The report contains the following information Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 109 Content Workflow Reports Title of content block ID number assigned to content block by Ektron CMS300 Last Editor Last user to edit the content block Date Date and time content block was last edited Modified Folder location of content block in Ektron CMS300 Web site Viewing Position in Approval Chain While viewing the Submitted Content report you can view a content block s position Is its approval chain To do so follow these steps 1 From the Submitted Content Report click the content block s title The View Content page is displayed Click the Properties tab 4 The content block s positio
13. Rows S panned Columns Spanned 50 Layout width C Not Specified f Percent I Word Wrap C Pixels Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment hi 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Splitting a Cell You can divide a cell into two If you split a cell each cell occupies one half the size of the original cell Row before split a E Row after split C To split a table cell into two cells follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 404 Working with Table Cells 1 Place the cursor in the cell that you want to split 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Split Cell from the menu Menus Cut Copy Paste Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Edit HTML Inset Tane neen Eia neer Eaolumn Insent Eel Delete Rians Delete ltalunmns Delete ells Menge ells Split Eel Table Properties Cell Properties ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture 4 Two cells now appear where only one appeared before Merging Two Cells You can merge two cells into one If you merge two cells the new cell contains all of the information from both The new cell s width equals the sum of the two cells that were merged Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 405 Working with Table Cells Cells Before Merge Cell After Merge mn To merge two or more cells follow these steps 1 Select the cells that you want to merge 2 Click t
14. on page 79 Each toolbar button is described below Name Deseripton Submit Submit the content block into the approval chain See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 79 Publish Approve and publish the content block to the Web site Note You have this option only if you are the last approver in the chain See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 79 Decline Refuse to publish the submitted content block and change its status to checked in cy Edit Check out the content block and make changes to it Note If you edit the content block you need to re submit it to the approval chain View Staged Click the View Staged button to view the content that has not 7 Published yet been published Click the View Published to view the content that is live on the Web site See Also Staged Content on page 449 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 447 Appendix A Content Statuses Button Description Back Go to previous window sm eee Marked for Deletion Content Content that is marked for deletion has been requested to be removed from the Web site by a user When a content block is marked for deletion it goes through the approval chain like a content block that is submitted for publishing When the content completes the approval chain it is deleted from the Web site See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 79 The table below describes the toolbar buttons ee
15. wines E K tr on _ Redefining Web Content Management Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 Ektron Inc 5 Northern Blvd Suite 6 Amherst NH 03031 Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 Email sales ektron com http www ektron com Copyright 2005 Ektron Inc All rights reserved EKTRON is a registered trademark of Ektron Inc Version 4 8 Revision 7 May 2 2005 For the latest version of this manual go to http www ektron com cms300 web cms aspx id 906 documentation EKTRON INC SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT READ THIS BEFORE LOADING SOFTWARE YOUR RIGHT TO USE THE PRODUCT DELIVERED IS SUBJECT TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS SET OUT IN THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT USING THIS PRODUCT SIGNIFIES YOUR AGREEMENT TO THESE TERMS IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT DO NOT DOWNLOAD CUSTOMER should carefully read the following terms and conditions before using the software program s contained herein the Software Downloading and or using the Software or copying the Software onto CUSTOMER S computer hard drive indicates CUSTOMER S acceptance of these terms and conditions If CUSTOMER does not agree with the terms of this agreement CUSTOMER should not download Ektron Inc Ektron grants and the CUSTOMER accepts a nontransferable and nonexclusive License to use the Software on the following terms and conditions 1 Right to use The Software is licensed for use onl
16. 4 The help screen appears in the right frame Ektron CMS Help Manuals e Developer Manual e Administrator Quickstart Manual e Administrator Manual e Wser Manual e Setup Manual Ektron Web Site Online Resources Visit Help Page on Ektron coam What s new with Ektron ChMS300 Ektron ChMS300 Feature Tour Learning Center Developer Resources Have a question Request a demo fram Ektron 5 Click on a link to open the documentation or Web page NOTE Your computer requires an internet connection to access the online resource links Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 269 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is a browser based Web content editor designed for dynamic Web sites It lets you create and publish your own Web content in any language supported by the operating system and your Web site More specifically eWebEditPro XML lets you perform Web page editing functions such as e copy content from any Windows based application e use Microsoft Word to edit Web content e cut copy and paste e find and replace text e check spelling e edit an image e change font style size attributes bold italics underline and color e begin lines with bullets or numbers e adjust indentation e right center or left justify text and images e adda bookmark hyperlink image or table e view your text as WYSIWYG or HTML code e insert or clean HTML source code You gain access to these functions
17. Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder To add a menu item via a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder that contains the menu to which you want to add items 2 Click the menu that you want to add items to 3 Inthe View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 164 Working with Menus Click the Add Item button El The Add Menu screen opens displaying a list of items that can be added to the menu 6 Use the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content block Adding a Content Block as a Menu Item on page 167 Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 168 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 169 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 169 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module To add a menu item via the menus module follow these steps From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Click the menu that you want to add a menu item to In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu Click the Add Item button Fl The Add Menu screen displays a list of items that you can add to the menu 6 Use to the table below to selec
18. Click the content folder that contains the collection D 292 768 0 2 72 0ME GF Content a Human Resour s Marketing The folder s content blocks appear in the right frame If you are using Ektron CMS300 s multi language support features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 153 Click the Collections button i The View Collections screen appears View Collections in Folder Human Resources Title ID Date Modified URL Link Main Jobs listing 2 04 Nov 2002 03 36 PM CMS300Sample hr asp The screen displays each collection created for the folder The following table explains each column Title The title assigned to the collection by the creator The ID assigned to the collection by Ektron CMS300 This number is used to store and retrieve the data to from the database Date When the collection was last edited Modified URL The default template used to display the content Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 140 Working with Collections To learn more about a collection and perform tasks on it proceed o Viewing a Collection on page 142 Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder To access the Collections screen that displays all collections in all content folders follow these steps 1 From the top level folders in the lower left frame of your Workarea click Modules Click the Collections folder 3 The Coll
19. Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 338 Editing Images Dialog Box w Brightness Miel Brightness Choose Color Standard Toolbar Button Ja Description Lets you choose the color of an annotation before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 339 Dialog Box Choose Font Editing Images Color El Ed Basic colors Sl eT nel ee DE f imi i ise ff ie oe fe Eee oT Custom colors Te HEBER Define Custom Colors gt Cancel Standard Toolbar Button Description A Lets you choose the color of annotation text before you insert it To change an annotation s color after inserting it place the cursor on the annotation and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 340 Dialog Box F Anal Black Italic O Arial Narrow F Arial Unicode MS F Batang O Berling Antigua O Book Antiqua Bald Color Depth Standard Toolbar Button Description Changes an image s color depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 363 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 Editing Images 341 Dialog Box w Color Depth OF x Color Depth 7 bit 2 colors 4 bit 16 colors 8 bit 256 color
20. Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 425 Section 508 Compliance a S e e 4 fos fed Insert Table Bs eae Aow Ea neet oum S a heer Eel a Delete Hows LJ Pelete talunmne Be pelete el 4 ei Menge ells fe Split Eel E Table Properties Seclion 508 Table WARNING Even if you change no values on the screen you must open this dialog box whenever you modify a table for example add a new row The table s properties required for Section 508 are generated when you click OK to close the dialog box To create a 508 compliant table follow these steps 1 Create a table as explained in Introduction to Tables on page 365 2 Select the table by moving the cursor to a table border until you see a four headed arrow illustrated below When a table is selected small squares surround it Employee Id Department 1546 1549 Human Resources 1550 Sales 1551 Adminstration 3 Click the Tables button then select Section 508 Table 4 The Section 508 Table Properties dialog box appears illustrated below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 426 Section 508 Compliance Section 508 Table Properties Microsoft Internet Explorer Sectian 306 Table Properties Heading Rows 0 Max 5 OK Heading Columns 0 Max 2 Cancel Summary pew o ooo Caption Horizontal Caption Alignment Not Set
21. Insert Table You can also access this dialog box after you insert it You would do this if you wanted to edit any of the information entered in the dialog To access this dialog after insertion follow these steps 1 Click the table 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Table Properties from the menu When creating a table you can specify the e number of rows and columns Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 366 Introduction to Tables e width e horizontal alignment on the page e background color or background picture e border size and color For more information about managing tables see Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 376 For more information about managing individual cells within a table see Working with Table Cells on page 391 Deleting a Table To delete a table follow these steps 1 Move the cursor over the table until the cursor becomes a four headed arrow 4 2 Click the mouse button The table becomes selected small Squares appear around it Co 3 Press lt Delete gt Inserting a Table within a Table You can insert a table within a table You might want to do this to arrange text in columns Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 367 Introduction to Tables NOTE HTML does not let you use tabs or spaces to align text in columns You must use a table to align columns You can remove the table s border so that no lines app
22. Revision 7 430 Editing XML Web Pages e Some tags provide a list of choices To view the list click the down arrow to the right of the tag circled in the illustration below Scroll through the list until you find the correct choice Then click it to enter it For example These tags can provide a most likely default value which is the value of the tag when you first see it Custom Tag Menu Options lf you move the cursor to an area of the screen where you can insert XML tags and right click the mouse three new menu options appear e Insert Custom Tag e tag name Tag Attributes e tag name Tag Properties For example 1 ir pm EHE ont Insert HTML v View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tad Book Section Tag Attributes Book Section Tag Properties The Insert Custom Tag option is explained in Inserting XML Tags on page 482 The tag name Tag Attributes option is explained in The Custom Tag Attributes Dialog on page 433 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 431 Editing XML Web Pages The tag name Tag Properties option is intended for developers so is not explained in this documentation This option is documented in the Developer s Reference Guide section Custom XML Dialog Boxes Inserting XML Tags some XML screens let you insert additional XML tags at certain locations If you move the cursor to a location where you can in
23. Start 12 00 4M End 1 00 PM 3 Click the View Events button The View Events screen appears listing all calendar events for that date From this screen you can perform the following functions Add anew event See Also Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 View edit and delete an existing event Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 208 Working with Calendars Editing Calendar Events The section explains how to edit a single event or a recurring series of events NOTE You can only edit a calendar event if you have edit permission for the folder to which the calendar is assigned Editing a Single Event After a calendar event is added to a calendar you may edit it to change the title location times etc To edit a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to edit as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 Click the event you want to edit The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 209 Working with Calendars Edit Calendar Event om tien ee Event Title weekly meeting Event Location New ork Room One Time Recurring W Update all recurring events associated with this event Start Date 4 May 2004 End Date 15 Jun 2004 Number of Events 0 Event will occur Event times Every day Every Tue Start 12 00 00 AM
24. Table Properties A green check means the calendar displays every day of the Display Weekends week A red X 4 means the calendar displays weekdays only Event Type Label Indicates if event types are assigned to this calendar See Also Understanding Event Types on page 203 One section of the Add Calendar Events screen displays available event types and lets the user assign them to the event Event Type Available Selected Company Holiday gt Mo Event Types Trade Show Title Company Event By default this text is Event Type Your system administrator can edit the text Event Types Available A green check means you can add event types to the calendar Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 196 Working with Calendars i nd Event Types Required A green check means that when entering a calendar event you must assign an event type to it Folder Name Name of content folder to which the calendar is assigned for permission purposes You can only add edit or delete events for calendars in folders to which you have been granted permission Folder Path Complete path to the calendar s content folder The View Calendar screen may contain the following toolbar buttons that let you perform other tasks View Show calendar in the Workarea Viewing a Calendar on Ea Calendar page 197 Back Return to previous screen if l Viewing a Calendar NOTE This section expla
25. Type on page 220 Note If you Add a Task Category or Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes By clicking the Edit link you can edit the Task Type chosen in the Task Type drop down box See Also Editing a Task Type on page 222 Note If you edit a Task Type while adding a task the task information Task Title Assigned To Language etc entered will be lost when the screen refreshes Choose a status for the task Your choices are Not Started In Progress Completed Waiting on Someone else Deferred If the task is not linked to a content block you can assign it to any state However if you later link the task to a content block via the Content link above the state switches to Not Started The state appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by state Start Date Using the calendar button choose a start date for the task The start date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by start date Due Date Using the calendar button choose the date by which the task needs to be completed The due date appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by due date Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 217 Managing Tasks Se Description Add additional information to describe the task The description appears on the View
26. Version 4 8 Revision 7 252 Using the Asset Management System See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 249 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the file NOTE To learn about working with folders see Working with Folders and Content Blocks on page 26 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view the asset types you can add View Contents of Folder Content Managed Files All Types HTML Content Office Documents 1033 28 Select Managed Files The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the managed file under a different language click the dropdown list and select the language French standard Mar 2005 03 29 Mar 2005 01 14 6 Click the Add Content button 4 7 The Edit Content screen opens as shown below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 253 Using the Asset Management System Edit Content Title English fU 5 4 Content Search Data Schedule e select file to be uploaded 8 Click the Browse button 9 Browse through your computer and network to the file you want to import When you do the file s path appears within the File field 10 Insert a Title 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable See Also Add to Quicklinks Table on page 39 and C
27. and you return to the View Content page or the Web page with the content in a checked in status If desired check out the content to make additional changes Select the workflow to perform on the content block When the historical version is placed in the approval chain and approved it is published to the Web site Comparing Historical Versions After you select an historical version of a content block you can view the differences between it and the current version To compare a historical version follow these steps 1 Select an historical version of content as described in Viewing a Historical Version of a Content Block on page 97 2 Click the View Differences button ER The historical and the current versions are compared To learn more about the comparison see Comparing Versions of a Content Block on page 87 Removing Applied XSLT You can only remove an applied XSLT when viewing historical versions of an XML content block If you remove the applied XSLT you can view the content without the irrelevant XML tags Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 99 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks The following table compares the views With XSLT Product Name FC Redstar Description The RC Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This new plane is for beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with orto have fun with The Redstar
28. ee listing of events for RC International news Description aa Location Label Location Start Time Label Start End Time Label End Table Properties Cell Height 90 pixels Cell Width 150 pixels Display Weekends Event Types Event Type Label Event Types Available Event Types Required Folder Name News Folder Path Marketing News The following table explains the fields on the View Calendar screen De ea Title given to the calendar The title identifies the calendar within the Workarea ID number automatically assigned to calendar This is used to display the calendar on a Web page Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 195 Working with Calendars Field Deserption Description given to the calendar Location Label Label for the calendar s location information This label appears on the calendar when a location is assigned to a calendar event 16 Gel S birthday part mM koom J End 3 00 PM Start Time Label Label for the calendar s start time This appears on the calendar when a start time is assigned to a calendar event End Time Label Label for the calendar s end time data This appears on the calendar when an end time is assigned to a calendar event Cell Height Height of cells in the calendar Helps determine the size of each calendar date s block Cell Width Width of cells in the calendar Helps determine the size of each calendar date s block
29. it will move down to the next row 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 295 Customizing Your Toolbar Creating a New Menu 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears Toolbar Customization View Ag Paragraph Format Format Special Characters LI Form Elements Table Position Objects CI Text Direction 5 Click New Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 296 Customizing Your Toolbar 6 Anew menu appears on the left side of the window above the existing menus The default name of the new menu is Custom 0 Toolbars Comm Toolbars Ern git 7 To rename the menu place the cursor in the field that displays the new menu and enter the new name NOTE If you click outside the toolbar name field you cannot later change the menu s name 8 To have the menu appear on your toolbar click in the small box to the left of the menu name 9 Click the Commands tab 10 Add buttons to the menu following the procedure described in Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box on page 294 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar You can move a menu from the toolbar to anywhere else on the screen even if eWebEditPro XML does not occupy the entire screen You can also change the orientation of a
30. on page 113 of days Information on the Report Each report displays the following information about content blocks in the selected status Field Description Title of content block Internal number assigned to content block by Ektron CMS300 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 102 Content Workflow Reports Field Description Date Modified If a Start Date was assigned to the content block it appears here Last Editor The user who last edited the content block Path Folder location of content block sorting and Filtering Content Reports In each content report you can sort and filter the data These include e Sorting by column e Filtering by user e Filtering by content folder The sorting and filtering actions in each content report are identical The following section uses the checked in content report as an example Sorting by Column Heading You can sort report data by any column heading By clicking ona heading you can sort the report by e Title e ID e Last editor e Date Modified Filter by User To display only content that was checked in by a user click the name of the user in the report When you do the report redisplays showing only content blocks which that user checked in Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 103 Content Workflow Reports Filter by Content Folder To display only content that was checked in to a selected folder click
31. space in the URL or address For example instead of entering sales ektron com enter sales lt blank gt ektron com Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 418 Working with HTML eWebEditPro XML creates pages for display on the World Wide Web or an intranet These pages use HTML hypertext markup language to format text and images for display in a browser You do not need to know HTML to use eWebEditPro XML However if you know HTML you can view insert or edit your Web page s HTML code Viewing and Editing HTML When you choose to view your page as HTML the editor cleans the content using a method determined by your Webmaster For more information see Cleaning HI ML in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide To view your page s HTML follow these steps 1 Click the View as HTML button Kh or right click the mouse and click View as HTML from the menu 2 EIEC ll Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML iw View as WYSIWYG View as HTML 2 The HTML code appears While viewing the code you can edit it using editor functions such as Cut Copy Paste and Replace To select all content press lt Ctrl gt lt A gt You can also set default values for the style size and color in which the HTML appears To do this right click the mouse and click Preferences When you do a dialog box Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 419 Working with HTML appears in which you
32. tart Date None Specified nd Date None Specified pate Created ii May 2004 10 02 AM pproval Method Do Not Force All 4oprovers pprovals f jedit admin ML Configuration None Specified HTML Conter Path abe fontent Searchable es Using Auto Hide The Workarea screen also provides an autohide feature which quickly switches between full right frame view and combination right left frame view When autohide is turned on the left frame is minimized unless you place the cursor to the left of the bar circled above If you place the cursor there the left frame appears As soon as you move the cursor back to the right frame the left frame disappears To turn on the autohide feature click the push pin icon near the top of the left frame When you do the push pin turns 90 degrees to indicate autohide is on Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 21 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To turn off autohide move the cursor to the left frame and click the push pin icon When you do the push pin returns to its original position sending Instant Email Ektron CMS300 lets you send email instantly to a user or user group from many screens available from the Smart Desktop Your ability to send instant mail is indicated by a small mail icon next to a user or group name indicated in red below roval 1 Content Awaiting Ap jew All Approvals itle Request Type Start Date Submitted by rinity In Li
33. uploading it Note An application that can display the file must be installed on your computer Return to the previous screen After you enter the necessary information and click the Save button the file is copied Now users with permissions to the selected folder can insert the file into their content Viewing Files Once a file is copied to the library you may preview it To preview a copied file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the library folder to which the file was copied 2 A list of files in that folder appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 123 Library Folder 3 Click the file you want to preview 4 The View File screen appears 1 x View Library Item in Folder Content files D 192 168 0 171 C 3 Library 10 Human Rese 20 Marketing 20 Products Title Punctuation rules Filename PCMS300Sample fuploadedFiles Punctuation Introducing Lists dc Library ID 35 Parent Folder Content Last User To Edit 4pplication Administrator Last Edit Date 19 May 2004 11 18 AM Date Created 19 May 2004 11 16 AM Preview Punctuation rules BEEPS p o EIEEE ERREA Tiz j The table below describes each field on the screen e en Parent Folder File s parent folder Users need permissions to this folder to insert the file into content Last User to Edit Last user who changed file Last Edit Date When file was last edited Date Created When file was origina
34. 4 8 Revision 7 246 Using the Asset Management System 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable See Also Add to Quicklinks Table on page 39 and Content Searchable on page 39 12 If desired add a summary search data a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Block Summary on page 64 e Adding or Editing Search Data on page 68 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 57 13 If desired you can edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 243 14 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Adding a Content Block on page 37 and Save Check in and Publish on page 243 Importing Several Office Documents into the AMS Your computer or network may have several Office documents that you want the AMS to manage Follow these steps to import several Office documents at once into Ektron s AMS See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 249 1 Place all files to be imported in the same folder on your computer or network From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the CMS folder in which you want to place the documents being imported NoTE To learn about working with folders see Working with Folders and Content Blocks on page 26 4 On the View Contents of Folder screen click the down arro
35. Accessing The Library on page 116 Searching the Library on page 119 Files on page 120 Hyperlinks on page 133 Images on page 134 Quicklinks and Forms on page 135 Terms Used in this Chapter An image is any graphic file which can include illustrations and photos Common image file extensions are gif jog tiff etc A file is type of computer file that can be launched from a browser such as Internet Explorer Examples include a Microsoft Word document and a PDF file A hyperlink is a commonly used or hard to remember Web address also known as a URL After you add hyperlinks to the library users can easily apply them to editor content So for example if the editor content is Contact Ektron the user can select the text click the library button select hyperlinks to find the Ektron hyperlink and apply that hyperlink to the text Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 115 Library Folder Library Folder Content hyperlinks M e hyperlinks Title ei D Date modified Ektron Ine 25 3 32 u20 2 Chapada 2 Once the page is published a person reading it can click the text to jump to the web address www ektron com e A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content block on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet Whenever a content block is created a quicklink is created for it e A for
36. CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 182 Working with Menus E Edit Menu Edit existing menu Editing a Menu on page 172 Delete Menu Delete menu and its menu items Deleting a Menu on page 185 e nn Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module To access the menu via the Modules folder follow these steps 1 Click the Modules folder from the left frame of the Workarea 2 Click the Modules folder again to expand its hierarchy 3 Click Menus from the folder hierarchy to view its content 4 The Menus Report screen displays all menus Menus Report 5S Modules aaa cr 44 Collections Title ID Description Fath Io Menus Sample menu 6 r a4 Calendars Products 1 Products H5 MemberShips 5 Continue from the section Click the menu you want to view on page 180 View Menus via Navigation Link on a Web Page To access the menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page on which your Web developer inserted the link to display the menu 2 Click the link that launches the menu on the Web page Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 183 Working with Menus 3 A DHTML menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu For information on how to display a menu on a Web page refer to the section on menus in the Developers Manual Reordering Menu Items To rearrange the items on a menu follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu you want to r
37. E E A EAE E 348 Bia y POE E AEA I E E A E EN E E E E E E 349 a EE EA EEA A E E E PAE E PE E EE E E S 350 Paste as New Image a crinssinstinwesisrivenninnseievs dannii 351 Pointer Selection cccccceeeecccceeeeseeeeeeaaeeeeeeeseueeeeeeeeesuaeeeeeesaaaeeeees 351 hy 1 EE E E A E E EAE I E EE 352 aE 1G E E E E E EEE A E E ens 353 F r E A ears eects ee 353 Reset Zoom HAUG rcisuiasieavieninaavcainrresniensiaverpiclecmedeesiaaaneaaenereneteain 354 RE i EEA E E VEA AEA E EEE A E E T 354 S PE EE ET EEEE T E EA EEE E PEE E E A E 355 S T EE S E E EENEN E NORE E E da EE E E E 356 S e EEP EATE EEA TE AENA TEE EN 357 EA S I EA EAEI EIE AE A EAE T TAE E e 357 Wie lees A E EE E EE E EAT EE EAE SE EEEE AN E RT 358 Bianna be ese A E I I A A EE EEEE E EE S R A 360 Twain FGI Cs vis set sariardntasancsianeierieensimnaciabpeemiinsnomapsnsicaagiaanacseveiain 361 Se OE sc snaseecenescerasearavesuassteneocsaunesseiessensene me E 361 FO sete A EEE ASE EE E EE E E E E E EE EA L A E T 362 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 vii Paa E 000 eRe eee ee ce eee ee eae eee re Cee E eye oat ee eee TE 363 rece epee cers E E E A A EE 363 Specifying Color Depth csccccsseesessecceeseescesseesasesseenees 363 Introduction to Tables ccccceeseceeseeceeseeensesenseeeeseeneneeees 365 Creating a TaDle ssiri 366 Deleting a Table iver tosictersareioesaneigisantasrmensraesenipeie 367 Inserting a Table within a Table ccssss
38. Edit Date 25 Jun 2004 07 25 16 AM Date Created 2 J Jun 2004 07 13 51 AM Description Hews page Include Subfolders Title ID URL Link A RedStar Airplane 5 smaller version B Servo Control Engineer 124 B Plastic Molder CMS400Sample uploadedimages redstar 14 CMS400Sample hr aspx id 14 Te ei 123 13 CMS400Samople hr aspx7tid 13 yahoo O www yahoo com 6 The following table explains the information on the View Menus screen Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 181 Working with Menus ee Information See Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder about menu on page 174 items Title assigned to the menu folder ID number assigned to the menu by Ektron CMS300 Note The ID for the Menu is automatically generated by the 300 application when you create a menu Language ID The decimal number representing the menu s language Path to the content folder that contains the menu Last User to Last user to edit this menu Edit Last Edit Date Date and time when this menu was last edited Date Created Date and time when this menu was created Description given to the menu The View Menu screen also provides the following buttons Add Menu Item Add item to menu Adding a Menu Item on page 164 Remove Menu Remove item from the menu Deleting a Menu Item ltem on page 186 Reorder Menu Adjust sequence of menu items Reordering Menu Item Items on page 184 Ektron
39. End pa Number of Events To Be Created MiA Event will occur Event times f Every da m r a Start 12 00 AM Every 7th of every Month Sack fzo AM Every first Thu of every Month Yearly every 7th of Apr Yearly every first Thu of Apr W Display the times for the event Hyperlink l Make the Hyperlink active Launch link in a new browser 3 Refer to the table below to complete to the Recurring fields SEE Eee Start Date Click the calendar icon Fes to display a calendar From it select a start date Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 204 Working with Calendars Fed Peserta End Date Click the calendar icon Fes to display a calendar From it select an end date for the series of recurring events Event will occur Select the frequency of the event from among the choices 4 Finish your edits Start Time Start Time on page 202 Display the times for the event Display the times for the event on page 202 Hyperlink Hyperlink on page 202 Make Hyperlink Active Make the Hyperlink Active on page 203 Launch Link in New Browser Launch link in a new browser on page 203 Event Types Event Type on page 203 5 Click the Save button El Adding a New Content Block for a Calendar Event While adding a new event to a calendar you can add a new content block You might use the content block to supply additional information about the event
40. FTP It does not appear if the mechanism is HTTP For more information see the eWebEditPro XML Administrator Manual section Managing Image Selection gt Examples of Implementing Image Selection gt Selecting Files from the Server Hedia File Selection x File Selection OF I Resolve Image Pathe Select New File Layout Width Cancel d Options Picture Height Border Thickness Alignment Maintain Aspect Ratio Spacing Horizontal jo Vertical jo Title Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 3 O Inserting Images Hedia File Selection x File Selection OF Cancel ude Images Select Server File Select Hew File Picture Options Width Height Border Thickness jo Alignment Reset W Maintain Aspect Ratio Spacing Horizontal Vertical Title You can also access this dialog box to modify a picture after you insert it To do this follow these steps 1 Click the picture 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Picture from the menu If you see the first dialog box proceed to Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 317 If you see the second dialog box proceed to Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box on page 321 Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box When the first Picture Properties dialog box appears click the Select New File button When you do the Insert Media Item dialog bo
41. Height Border Thickness and Alignment If you adjust the picture s width height border thickness and or alignment and later want to restore all of those settings to their original values click the Reset button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 326 Inserting Images Layout Width 20 Height 20 Border Thickness fo Alignment Mot set 7 L r f Note that you cannot selectively restore some settings the Reset button automatically restores all of them Adding Space around the Picture On the Picture Properties dialog box you can use the Spacing fields Horizontal and Vertical to add space around the picture You enter a number of pixels to determine spacing value Spacing Horizontal 0 Vertical 0 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 327 Inserting Images The following graphic illustrates the effect of adding spacing to a picture This image has no vertical or horizontal space BS Ba This image has 20 prels of vertical space no horizontal space This image has 20 pels of horizontal space no vertical space BS BS This image has 20 pzels of vertical space and 20 preels of horizontal space Editing the Picture s Title The title that you entered in the Insert Media Item dialog box defaults into the Title field of the Media Selection dialog box You can edit the title in this field if desired NOTE The title is also the ait text for the
42. Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Change the font size Your Webmaster determines which font sizes are available a2pt ont Size h he f lor E Eont Color a Change the font color WSipackground Color Change the background color of the text Note To remove background color from selected text click the Normal button ja ke th Id F pold Ctrl B Make the text bold F italic Ctrl I Make the text italic I Underline Ctrl U Make the text underlined Remove all formatting from selected text Boma O Ramovealiomategtomsdecatien f Insert a blank space character Although you can add spaces in the editor using the lt space gt bar on the keyboard those spaces are ignored when the content is displayed by a browser Insert copyright symbol Insert registered trademark symbol Registered Trademark l Insert trademark symbol E and Insert special characters such as Ly NN from a drop down list Special Characters To view the list click the black down arrow Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 282 Toolbar Buttons Position Objects Options These buttons let you absolutely position elements pictures tables etc anywhere on a page WARNING Some older browsers for example Netscape 4 do not display absolutely positioned elements Absolute position uses the style attribute If you use this feature the content is not compatib
43. Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 49 Working with Folders and Content Blocks e employee e green All Words All Words works like an and function The search returns only content that has the words partners and content and Monday and employee and green The words can be in any order within the file Any Word Any Word is almost the opposite of All of the Words It works like an or function When you select this option the search returns all files that have at least one of the words entered in the search text field In other words it returns files with the word partners or content or Monday or employee or green Exact Phrase Exact Phrase returns content blocks that have all five words in the order specified in the search text field A better example would be to search for a phrase such as Content Management Solution The search yields only content blocks with that exact phrase Contains Match Partial Words Although you cannot search for wild cards the Match Partial Words option does almost the same For example enter at into the search text field then select Match Partial Words The search returns all content with the letters at finding words such as At Bat Chatter Atoll ATM etc Search Data The next section of the search screen lets you choose one or more customized search criteria Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 50 Search String lt lt Working with Folders a
44. See Also Comparing Versions of a Content Block on page 87 View History View history of selected content block See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks on page 94 View Published Displays currently published version of content block View Staged Displays staged content See Also Staged Content on page 449 Selects the language of the content blocks being Select language displayed Viewing a Folder To view any folder under the content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea as described in Site Preview on page 10 2 Click Content from the left lower side of the Workarea Administrate Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 31 Working with Folders and Content Blocks 3 All content blocks in the content folder and the selected language appear on the right side of the screen Sub folders appear in the upper left frame 4 To work with any folder or its content blocks click the folder When you do its content blocks appear in the right frame NOTE You can only view folders for which your system administrator has granted permission 5 If your system supports more than one language you can select content blocks for a particular language or all languages using the language dropdown list illustrated below Yiew Contents of Folder Content Contact Ektron 1 15 Pee ei a e eena Greeting 1 od O35 PM Home Page Content 1 CLO Sh ee
45. Task screen circled below View Task Task Tithe testing self assignment Assigned To e jedit Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Completed Due Date 23 Jun 2004 Start Date 11 Jun 2004 Description testing self assignment Comments Date Time 4dded By Comments 5 Click the Save button T 6 If email notification is enabled an email is sent to the user user group to which the task was assigned Selecting a Content Block for the Task When you click Select Content from the Add Task screen the Select Content screen appears It shows only content blocks in the selected language Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 218 Managing Tasks Select Content Eee aE cee ONEA eect Please select content by navigating the folders below Path 5B Human Resources i Marketing B Products 5B Support im Syndication C Contact Ektron Greeting Home Page Content C Introducing the RC Redstar C new content You should only select a content folder for which you have permissions To select an existing content block to assign to the task follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content block Click any folder to open it 2 Click the circle to the left of the block LI Support 5B Syndication contact Ektron C Greeting 3 Press the Save button M Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 219 Managing Tasks Adding a Task Category and Task Type Tas
46. The current status of the content block See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 442 Last User to Edit The last user to edit this content block Last Edit Date When the content block was last edited Start Date When the content block will go live on the Web site End Date When the content will be removed from the Web site Action on End Date What happens to the content block when its end date and time are reached See Also Setting Archive Options on page 61 Date Created When the content block was created Approval Method Whether all approvers must sign off on content block before it is published managed by your system administrator Approvals The users in the approval chain for this content block See Also Approving Declining Content Blocks on page 76 XML Configuration The XML Configuration applied to the content block This is typically managed by your system administrator The folder path to the content s folder A slash represents the Content folder Content Searchable Yes appears if the content will be found when someone searches your Web site Adding a Content Block lf you have permission to add a content block to a folder you can create content blocks for that folder After you create the content block your system administrator must insert in onto a page on your Web site The following flowchart illustrates a typical sequence of events when working with content blocks E
47. To enter any page on the internet enter its Web address For example www ektron com To link to a content block on your Web site click the library button fi This type of link is known as a guicklink The Quicklinks dialog appears and you can navigate to the content block The last published version of a linked content block appears If a content block has never been published nothing appears If you select a hyperlink the title of the selected content block replaces any text in the Event Title field You can edit the new title if desired Note You can add a new content block from the Quicklink dialog See Adding a New Content Block for a Calendar Event on page 205 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 202 Working with Calendars D Make the Hyperlink Active Launch link in a new browser Event Type NOTE Check this box to activate the link assigned in the Hyperlink field If you do when a user views the calendar he can click the event to jump to the specified Web page Check this box if you want the Web page or quicklink specified in the Hyperlink field to appear in a new browser window when someone clicks it If you do not check this box the new Web page replaces the current one when the link is clicked Note This field only appears if your system administrator set up one or more event types for this event See Also Understanding Event Types on page 203 To apply an event type
48. WeblmageFX command 347 G gray content border color meaning 442 green content border color m eaning 442 H height work page customizing for user 265 help online accessing 267 history button view floating toolbar 5 content accessing from Web page 95 accessing via Workarea 95 screen options 98 viewing 31 window 96 horizontal flip WeblmageFX comm and 347 horizontal line inserting 279 HTML cleaning 421 editing 420 inserting 420 viewing 419 hyperlinks 413 adding as menu option 169 creating 413 definition 115 editing 418 entering manually 415 library adding 133 adding to content 134 editing 134 viewing 133 preventing 418 removing 418 testing 416 to a bookmark in another web page 417 to content block finding 30 using a Quicklink 414 icon menu 3 Ignore All field eWebDiff 91 Ignore Case field eWebDiff 91 Ignore Format Attributes field eWebDiff 91 image extensions library setting 118 image info WeblmageFX command 348 image upload from Microsoft Word docum ent 314 inserting picture from com puter 319 media file selection 317 path library setting 118 images adding space around 327 aligning 325 background cell inserting 397 table inserting 386 border color 324 thickness 324 deleting 329 deleting from server 319 editing 331 inserting 316 from server into editor 318 inserting from your computer 319 library adding to content 135 editing titles 134 overwriting 134 Ektron CMS300 Use
49. Workflow An AMS asset can proceed through the same workflow as a regular content block A diagram of this workflow is below Check In Approval Chain Publish on scheduled Viewing AMS Assets within the CMS To view an asset follow these steps Grad From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the asset s folder From the View Content screen click the asset SN The View Content screen for the asset appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 259 Using the Asset Management System Deleting an AMS Asset You can only delete an asset if its status is Checked In or Approved To delete an asset from the AMS follow these steps From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the asset s folder From the View Content screen click the asset I The View Content screen for the asset appears 5 Click the Delete button T Like a content block an asset must go through the approval chain before it is removed Approving AMS Assets Assets are placed into the approval chain just like content blocks For more information see Approving Declining Content Blocks on page 76 Adding Assets to Collections and Menus You can add an asset to a collection or a menu just as you would an HTML content block For more information see Working with Collections on page 138 and Working with Menus on page 157 Asset Reports Ektron CMS300 provides several reports that
50. a unique title Also any Summary search data schedule comment and task information applies to that file only If you import several at once you are not required to assign a title lf you do not assign a title the file s title is the same as Its name including the extension For example Proposal for Town Manager PDEF If you do assign a title to several files appended to the title in parentheses is the original file name including the extension So for example if you import three personnel forms at once and assign them the title Personnel the titles might look like this Personnel Vacation Request doc Personnel Direct Deposit Form doc Personnel Absence Report Form doc Also any summary search data schedule comment or task information you enter applies to all files So it would be efficient to enter this kind of information if it applies to all or even most of the files For example if you are importing 10 files and eight have the same search data insert the search data before checking them in Then change the search data for the remaining two After you check in or publish these files you can edit the summary search data schedule comment or task information by selecting the files individually Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 249 Using the Asset Management System The Work Offline Option After creating or editing an asset you can save it to your local computer instead of the
51. airplanes cars gt Interr ars RC d link rel stylesheet href default css type text css gt the spc yEap gt wing tc lt BODY topmargin 0 lJeftmargin 0 marginheight 0 marginwidth 0 Ew Feg ightmargin 0 bottommargin 0 gt a a lt TABLE WIDTH 100 BORDER 0 CELLPADDING 0 CELLSPACING 0 o background graphics header_back gif gt nitys n lt TR gt igines z _ lt TD gt lt IMG SRC graphics header gif gt lt TD gt lt header graphic a chee Note photoshop fileCheader psd included to change company name gt ie chee lt TR gt gh qual lt TABLE gt oo 1d will Wietable border 0 width 778 cellspacing 0 cellpadding 0 TT cel lspacing 0 gt lt top navigation gt lt tr gt lt td align left amp nbsp lt a class nav href index asp gt lt b gt Home lt b gt lt a gt amp nbs T l nbsp lt a class nav href products asp gt Products lt a gt 8nbsp amp nbsp lt a On this Web page notice the keywords are included in the meta tag and the title is in HTML tags These appear according to how the administrator sets up the search data definitions Entering or Editing Search Data To enter or edit a content block s search data follow these steps WARNING You may only edit the search data of content blocks that are published checked in or checked out by you Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 72 Add
52. and Find Next the Find What field of the Search and Replace Replacing Text on dialog box page 304 E Ctrl P Print the editor content Print Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 278 Copy Ctrl V Ea Paste Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only E Undo Ctrl Z Reverse the most recent action as if it never occurred You can undo as many actions as you wish Ctrl Y Reverse the undo action reo o ee AE Begin spell checker Checking Spelling 4 Spell Check Upon Demand on manual page 309 Turn on or off spell check as you type feature Checking Spelling AEC w Spell Check as You Type on automatic page 308 f Bookmark Create a bookmark Using Bookmarks poner on page 409 a Change information about a hyperlink Using Hyperlinks Edit Hyperlink on page 413 A Remove a hyperlink Removing a Remove Hyperlink Hyperlink on page 418 Ta Insert a picture Inserting Images Picture on page 316 Zf image Editer a Edit an image Te on Insert or edit a table Introduction to Tables on page 365 T o a Edit content in Microsoft Word Editing in Microsoft Edit in Microsoft Word a Word on page 313 iC Insert a comment into the content Entering Bea tue anens eWebEditPro XML only Comments on page 234 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 279 Toolbar Buttons
53. appears Click the Delete This and Associated Recurrring Events button 3 A confirmation message appears Click OK Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 212 Managing Tasks Managing Tasks A task is a request from one user to another to perform an action within Ektron CMS300 Examples of a tasks include e updating content e publishing a content block e updating an image e reordering a collection The Tasks folder displays all tasks that are either assigned to you or that you assigned to another user or user group You can also assign tasks to yourself A task may or may not be related to a specific content block If it is you can access a content block then attach a task to it This kind of task is managed just like the other tasks but you can also view and update it via the attached content block For more information see Viewing a Task on page 224 This chapter explains how to work with tasks through the following topics e Creating a Task via the Task Folder on page 214 e Creating a Task via a Content Block on page 224 e Viewing a Task on page 224 e Editing a Task on page 230 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 230 e Deleting a Task on page 233 e Viewing a Task s History on page 234 e Task Module Toolbar on page 235 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 213 Managing Tasks Creating a Task via the Task Folder This topic consists of
54. box Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 396 Working with Table Cells Custom Background W Unassigned Background Color Specifying a Background Image for a Cell Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 386 explains how to apply a background image to a table You can also apply a background image to a cell Your Webmaster determines which images are available To insert an image into a cell follow these steps Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu oY FS Move the cursor to the Background Image field of the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color eee W Unassigned Background Image Select Image 5 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears 6 Click the image of your choice 7 Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a cell Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 397 Working with Table Cells e lf the cell is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the cell e If the cell is smaller than the image the top left corner of the image appears in the top left corner of the cell The rest of the image fills as much of the cell as possible e Make sure the image does not obscure a user s ability to read the cell text if any exists Deleting a Background Image Move t
55. button 29 WeblImageFX command 344 deleting cell 393 folders 55 table 367 Detect All field eWebDiff 91 difference content view toolbar button 4 dimensions WebImageFX comm and 345 Do not apply XSLT button 29 document creating asset management sys tem 252 importing into DMS 245 importing several into AMS 247 Office creating asset managem ent system 240 documentation online accessing 267 E edit button floating toolbar 4 editing content block overview 5 content toolbar button 29 HTML 420 email address user editing 264 instant modifying 24 requirements 23 sending 22 where available 24 notification disabling 264 end date setting for content 60 eWebDiff window 90 exit without save WeblmageFX comm and 346 exit WeblmageFX command 346 extensions file allowed in library 118 image allowed in library 118 F file extensions library setting 118 library editing title 125 upload path library setting 118 files copying to library 120 library inserting into content 130 overwriting 126 viewing 123 finding content block 5 text 304 floating toolbar 3 folders adding sub folders 54 button for deleting 29 delete 55 information available when viewing 32 viewing 31 fonts background color 282 color 282 heading size 281 size 282 style 281 form elements toolbar 284 forms adding to content 135 replacing form or element inform ation 285 updating form or element inform ation 284 viewing 136 freehand
56. can affect the cell whose width you set Setting cell width only guarantees that the cell will not be ess than the width you specify lf you want to ensure that a cell s size does not change set all cells in a column to that width To specify a cell s width follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell whose width you want to set Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu Lee YS The Cell Properties dialog box appears Cell Properties Span Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Layout i Not Specified f Percent Tor aford tran Pizel 6 In the layout section of the dialog box enter the cell width at the Width field You can enter the width in pixels or percentage These choices are explained in Specifying Table Width on page 378 7 Click OK Inserting a Cell To insert a cell follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 392 Working with Table Cells 1 Move the cursor to the right of where you want the new cell to appear 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Cell from the menu The new cell appears to the left of the cell in which the cursor resides when you click Insert Cell The cursor cell and all cells to its right shift right to make room for the new cell In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked Insert Cell Before _ E CC Deleting a Cell To delete one o
57. can edit the content Ektron encourages you to contact us with y feedback about Ektron s Web content auth solutions The content remains checked out until it is checked in by the check out user or your system administrator Each option you may perform on a checked out content block is described below Button Name Description CE Check In Check in content block View Staged Click the View Staged button to view the content that has not Published yet been published Click the View Published button to view the content that is live on the Web site See Also Staged Content on page 449 Go to previous window Submitted Content A yellow border shows that a user has submitted the content block into the approval chain The border remains yellow until the content is published or declined While the content is in the approval chain no user can check it out Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 446 Appendix A Content Statuses Products Support L7 L Ta eS E Content management systems from Eki Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordabl full featured content management systems address tk organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content management With Ektron s browser based solutions busin a ee ae ae ee eee eee Camere ed i ie a Sr eee nee pone ee err ae aa See Also Example of an Approval Chain
58. change Change any of the field values For documentation of the fields see Complete the screen using the following table on page 145 Deleting a Collection When you no longer want a collection you can delete it To delete a collection follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 152 Working with Collections 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 139 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 142 Click the Delete button 7 A confirmation message appears Click OK to proceed Working with Collections in a Multi Language system NOTE In a multi language Ektron CMS300 system you can create a language specific edition of each collection For example prior to the 4 7 Release the RC International sample site s products page had a collection in the default application language English unless you change it From 4 7 on you can create an edition of a collection in every enabled language When a visitor to your site selects a language then navigates to a page with a collection Ektron CMS300 displays the collection in the selected language if available If not Ektron CMS300 displays nothing Note the contrast between the collections and content blocks if a collection is not available in the select
59. document This action returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor It does not submit the content into the approval chain Rather it allows you and other users to continue changing it Save Save the content without leaving the editor It is a good idea to save your work frequently Cancel Close the editor without saving changes ey Y Editing a Content Block Ektron CMS300 content can be in any of several statuses as described in Appendix A Content Statuses on page 442 You can only edit a content block for which you have permission and in one of the following statuses e published e checked in e checked out by you Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 40 Working with Folders and Content Blocks submitted for your approval NOTE Once you check out a content block it cannot be checked out by other users until you check it in Steps in Editing a Content Block 1 Access the View Content screen for the content block you want to edit as described in Viewing a Content Block on page 33 Select the language whose content blocks you want to view Click the Edit button L The editor opens with the content block inserted From the edit content window you can e Edit content e Create or edit a Summary e Specify search data for the content eEnter or update a comment eEnter or update start and end dates eSave changes e Check in the content e Submit the co
60. either from the toolbar at the top of the editor window or from a menu that appears when you right click the mouse inside the editor Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 270 Introduction to eWebEditPro XML Using eWebEditPro XML eWebEditPro XML is like many other word processing applications You type text and then use toolbar buttons illustrated below and menu options to change the text s appearance or perform functions on it such as spell checking I Bi Apply Style Normal Organization of this Documentation The next section Creating a Simple Web Page on page 272 walks you through the steps required to create a simple Web page The following section Toolbar Buttons on page 276 explains e each toolbar button e functions that appear when you right click the mouse Many of these functions are simple and require only a brief explanation The last section Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features on page 302 explains how to use the more advanced features Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 271 Creating a Simple Web Page This section walks you through the process of creating a simple Web page using only a few of the many features available Later sections explain all of the features and how to use them Your Finished Web Page When you finish this exercise your simple Web page will look like this II Wt pi n i M Illi hll il fi
61. end date How Does It Work When you create a content block or modify an existing one you can select a go live date and time If you do and the content makes it through the approval chain Ektron CMS300 publishes the content block to the live site at that time For example your company is having a sale of the century ina month and everything is ready except the announcement You decide to update your Web site to let the public know about the sale With this feature you create the Web content now and set it to go live a week before the sale This topic is explained through the following subtopics e Seiting a Start Date on page 57 e Setting an End Date on a Content Block on page 60 e Setting Archive Options on page 61 setting a Start Date To set a start date follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 57 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 1 Access the editor by adding a new content block or editing an existing one lf adding a new content block enter a title and the content 3 Click the Schedule tab Tithe Contact Ektron English Content Search Data Schedule Comment Bi Apple Style Heading 4 Times New Roman 3 12 pt lA BBBBHA SOE Blom wae 4 Click the calendar button next to the start date field LOTTIE TIL pA eeu MMY COTEL Satie Start Date Moka lt Chola Klearmnal Werdars 5 The Ektron CMS300 calendar pops up 6 Selec
62. end of the text Additional Options on the Dialog Box The dialog box also lets you specify e asearch direction e if the search considers the case upper or lower of the search term e whole word match Specifying a Search Direction The search begins where the cursor is when you click Find Next To make sure you locate every occurrence of a term place the cursor at the top of the content before beginning the search If you begin the search from somewhere other than the top of the page use the Direction field to search from the current location to the top or bottom of the file Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 305 Finding and Replacing Text Find And Replace ww ooo Replace with Match whole word only Replace Mies Replace All Direction Up 2 pow Cancel To search from the Click this option in the cursor location to the Direction field Considering the Case of a Search Term By default the search ignores the case upper or lower of a search term In other words if you enter Bob in the Find What field the search finds bob Bob BOB etc lf you want the search to be case sensitive use the Match case check box on the Find window If you enter Bob in the Find What field and place a check in the Match case box the search only stops at Bob not bob or BOB Find And Replace Find what iit hi Find Next Replace with T Match whole word only Replace All Direct
63. exhaust engines and are now used in both the Sportster and the cheetah Both the manifold and pipe are made from high quality aluminum This new pipe is more durable and will withstand a bad crash The editor resembles popular word processing software You can enter text then select it and click a button to change its display properties For example you can make text bold change the color or copy and paste it You can also insert images tables links to other Web pages and check spelling The Lifecycle of a Content Block After you edit the content block you typically submit it for approval to one or more individuals who oversee changes to your Web site These people can review edit and approve the change When the Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 6 Introduction to Ektron CMS300 last approver signs off the new content becomes available on the Web site In some cases you are one of the content approvers In this case you receive an email notifying you that a content block needs approval You look it over change it as needed then pass it on to the next approver If you do not agree with the changes you can decline the request In this case the user who made the edits is informed that the change is not approved The following graphic illustrates the content approval cycle Create or edit content Publish to Web site To help track a content block s position in this workflow Ektron CMS30
64. explain a typical approval chain e Creating a Content Block on page 80 e First Approver on page 81 e Second Approver on page 83 Creating a Content Block The first step is to create a content block To create a new content block Log in to Ektron CMS300 as a SportsWriter 2 Create a content block as described in Adding a Content Block on page 37 Click the Submit button 3 at the top of the window The content block is in the approval chain The first user in the chain receives an email saying the content block is ready for approval Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 80 Approving Declining Content Blocks H w E3 7 From Webmaster yourcompany corm Date Friday May 03 2002 4 16 PM To SportsEditon yourdomain cam Subject Request for content aporoval The content Red Sox Win World Seres has been submitted tor your approval by Sports Writer To locate the content the folder path in your workarea 1s Sports The following lnk will take you to the submutted content block on the Web site httow 192 168 0 156 CMS200Samplefndes asp 7id 17 Please Note You must loan and select the preview icon to view the changes The content was submitted for approval on 03 May 2002 4 16 19 PM Approvals SportsEditor Editorln Chief Comment NOTE Emails are only sent if your Administrator enables them The content contributor Sports Writer has completed his role i
65. explains each toolbar button and drop down list NOTE _ The Data Designer feature also has a toolbar For information see Using the Data Designer on page 177 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 277 Toolbar Buttons For more information see Equivalent Keystroke Internet Explorer only Ctrl X Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory also known as the clipboard y Cut If you later cut or copy more information onto the clipboard the new information overwrites the original information Ctrl C Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on where it is page 303 If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location C Ctrl A Select all content Select All z Deselect all selected content Select None p Text Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain ASR text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied aa Replace Launches the Search and Replace dialog Finding and box The dialog searches for and lets you Replacing Text on optionally replace text that you specify page 304 mh Find next occurrence of the string entered into Finding
66. field on PowerPoint PowerPoint s File Properties window s Statistics tab Tips on Responding to Search Criteria Fields e If the search field is a text field you specify contains or not contains Then a text field appears to the right Date Modited Any Comments Any Language Any Last CMS Editors Last Name Johnson CMS teaser Any CMS Status An Here enter the search text for that field For example if the field is Last CMS Editors Last Name and you insert Johnson into the text field the search finds all files authored by anyone whose last name is Johnson Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 53 Working with Folders and Content Blocks lf the search field is a date field the dropdown list lets you choose Before Between or After Use Before to select all dates prior to a specified date Use After to select all dates ater than a specified date Use Between to select dates by specifying a beginning and end date All dates in between are considered If the search field is numeric the dropdown list lets you choose Less Than More Than Equal To or Between Adding Sub Folders To further organize content in your Ektron CMS300 Web site you can create sub folders to store related content blocks NOTE The ability to add a sub folder is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Add Folder button i on the View Contents of Folder sc
67. for the hidden text field e Name e Value Inserts a text field For example ab fab Text field lt input size 15 vyalue This is initial content name mycontent gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the text field Name Value Size the number of characters in the field If a user s entry exceeds the size the field scrolls to the right F Inserts a password field For example Wk Password lt input type password value name mypassword gt A password differs from a free text field in that the user entry appears as asterisks not to the actual characters This is done to prevent an onlooker from seeing the password When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the password field e Name e Value e Size the number of characters in the field If a user s entry exceeds the size the field scrolls to the right Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 287 Toolbar Buttons Inserts a textarea field For example lt textarea name mycontent rows 5 cols 40 gt This is initial content lt textarea gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the textarea field Name Value Columns Rows Inserts a radio button For example Radio button lt input type radio checked checked name mybutton gt When you click
68. image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason The Options Button When you click the Options button on the File Properties dialog box the options dialog box appears The box displays information about your connection to the Web server Cancel For information about these settings see Uploading Images in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 328 Inserting Images Moving an Image to the Server If you insert an image from your computer into eWebEditPro XML content that image must be moved to the server when you save the content The image can only appear on Web pages that display it after you move it to the server When you save content that incudes an image you inserted the following dialog appears Files Wanting for Upload Files for Upload ES Upload Now Upload Later ea E All inserted files appear in the dialog which also estimates how long it will take to move the files to your server If you do not want to wait that long to upload the files click Upload Later If you do this the images will not appear on the published Web content until you move them to the server Mone W enet 13 KB Estimated Upload Time foo 00 05 Title You can also enter a Title for the image near the bottom of the screen If you do this text appears when the user r
69. image the command only changes that area Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 357 Editing Images Dialog Box Sharpen fel men Text Standard Toolbar Button T Description Places text on an image You can also change the tex s size font color and attributes bold italic etc To use the Text command follow these steps Click the Text button T Move the cursor to where you want to place the text Click the mouse button and drag a rectangle in which to insert the text NOTE Make sure the rectangle is large enough to accommodate your text The rectangle disappears after you enter text 4 Type the text 5 Click outside the rectangle to close it 6 To change the text or its font size style color etc place the cursor over the text and right click the mouse The text attributes dialog appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 358 Editing Images Dialog Box Attributes Font Attributes Color Attributes Text Attributes Font Style OB atang Bold hg foaMd S Mincho OPM ingLill oS inSun Slee el Ol lg 2 Sample AaBbYyZz T Underline Strikeout The following table lists functions you can perform with this dialog font style bold italic etc strikeout for example samp e Font Attributes Strikethrough font color Color Attributes Primary Color if text wraps when it reaches the Text Attributes Wr
70. menu that is not on the toolbar from a horizontal to vertical To move a menu follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the DE E beginning of the menu Click the mouse 3 Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere on the screen 4 After you place the menu where you want it release the mouse button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 297 Customizing Your Toolbar Changing the Menu s Orientation To change the menu s orientation follow these steps Drag the menu from the toolbar 2 Move the cursor to the bottom of the menu until it becomes a double headed arrow illustrated below ee EBM om fe wee SE 3 Drag the cursor to the lower left As you do the menu s orientation changes from horizontal to vertical illustrated below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 298 The Context Sensitive Menu This section explains the functions available on the menu that appears when you right click the mouse within the eWebEditPro XML editor You can also access this menu by pressing the application key E Because this menu can change depending on what you are doing it is called a context sensitive menu Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML wv View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom
71. more about Is see the Ektron CMS300 Administrator Manual 35 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Button or Description For more information see Tab A Check for content linked to this content Add Task Attach a task to a content block Task Module Toolbar on page 235 Properties View and modify these settings The Managing XML chap e XML Configuration ter of the Ektron CMS300 Administrator manual e Content Searchable l Check this box if the con tent should be found when someone searches your Web site View View If you can view content blocks in language more than one language select a language from the drop down list Add Add select select language language Identify all content blocks with Checking for Broken quicklinks to this content block Quicklinks on page 44 Cd H amp Lets you copy current content Translating a Content Block to block into new block and Another Language on page 41 translate it to selected language Properties The content properties screen contains information about the content block Content Title The title assigned to the content block Content ID The ID number assigned to the content block The ID number is used to retrieve content from a database Content language The content block s language Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 36 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Field Description Status
72. of selected content blocks in a folder and possibly subfolders Display external hyperlinks X amp library assets Display content block summary optional Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 155 Working with Collections Display additional content block information comment last modified date start date end date user who last edited it ID number path relative to your site s root Can be multi leveled that is you can have submenus Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 156 Working with Menus Working with Menus Ektron CMS300 s Menu feature lets users create and maintain a dropdown menu system for your Web site The menu options can link to content blocks library assets external hyperlinks and submenus Below is a sample menu Products Support Hews Careers hii In this example delivered with Ektron CMS300 the menu appears when the person viewing the Web page moves the cursor over Products The above display illustrates the menu s appearance to a visitor to your site However if a content contributor with permission to edit menus signs in to Ektron CMS300 then views the menu it has additional options for editing the menu or adding a content block here t NOTE For more information on adding content see Adding a Content Block on page 37 This chapter describes the following aspects of managing menus Ektron CMS300 User Manua
73. on page 104 The selected content blocks are either submitted to the next publisher published immediately or deleted depending on the approval chain set for the content block Checked In Report The Checked In Content report displays all the content blocks currently in a checked in status To learn how to access sort view edit and select content blocks on this report see Accessing the Reports Folder on page 101 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 107 Content Workflow Reports The report displays the following information Title of content block ID number assigned to content block by Ektron CMS300 Last Editor Last user to edit the content block Date Date and time content block was last edited Modified Folder location of content block in Ektron CMS300 Web site Submitting Multiple Content Blocks After selecting content blocks use the submit toolbar option IE to submit them for approval or publication depending on your position in the approval chain Checked Out Report The Checked Out Content report displays all content blocks currently in a checked out status The report displays the following information Title Title of content block ID number assigned to content block by Ektron CMS300 Last Editor Last user to edit the content block Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 108 Content Workflow Reports Date Date and time content block was last edited
74. on page 180 Click the menu you want to edit The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all menu items View Menu Products aP 41 LY D view in English US z ada selectlanquage x IRC Cars A U OO FRC Planes B D g Submenu Dec Lily O RC Redstar O save P Ektron com amp The Trinity Exhaust Pipe amp U LIRC Cheetah O Dee sportster y Internal web page UProcuss Page Y O Library asset lore Info The following icons indicate the type of each menu item and the options you can perform on them lon Menu item type Available actions For more information see Submenu Add submenu item gy Adding an Item to a Submenu on page 170 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 174 Working with Menus leon Menu item type Available actions For more information see Reorder submenu items Reordering Menu Items on page 184 Edit submenu Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 Delete submenu ff Deleting a Submenu on page 186 External Web page Edit external Web page Editing an External Hyperlink C Menu Item on page 178 Delete External Web Removing a Menu Item via its page i Content Folder on page 186 ie Library asset Edit library asset cy Editing a Library Asset Menu Item on page 178 Delete library asset i Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 186 Editing a Menu Item vi
75. on the right is a Submenu It appears when the user hovers the cursor over the menu item to the left RC Planes The right pointing arrow indicates that a submenu is available ucts Support Mews Careers Search Calendar Access to the Menus Feature There are three ways to access the Menus feature the Workarea by choosing the associated content folder then clicking the View Menus button the Workarea by choosing Modules gt Menus the Edit Menu option on the sample menu displayed above If you choose the first or second option you then select a specific menu Next that menu appears on the View menus screen For the third option the selected menu appears on the View Menu screen From the View Menus screen you can perform the following actions on a menu Create a new menu Edit menu information URL and template link Translate the menu into another language Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 159 Working with Menus Delete the menu Add or remove items Change the sequence of menu items Edit menu items For submenus Managing Menus Ektron CMS300 gives you the flexibility to add edit view and delete a menu The following sections explains how to do that add remove items change sequence of menu items edit menu information edit information about menu items Adding a New Menu on page 160 Adding a Menu Item on page 164 Adding a New Content Block to a Men
76. option to specify that option as a default value on the form Lepap Mame high school Add Change Del fq high school high school C college college If you place a check mark next to an option the user only needs to press lt Tab gt to select the option as opposed to placing the cursor next to the option and clicking the mouse Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 289 Toolbar Buttons Ei Inserts a File Upload field and a Browse button For example File Upload lt input type file size 10 name Save gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the File Upload e Name e Size the number of characters in the field If a user s entry exceeds the size the field scrolls to the right Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 290 Customizing Your Toolbar The eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more menus Each menu has one or more buttons You can recognize the beginning of a menu by the double vertical bars circled in the illustration S BBM Sloe eael S ml e Bs ie Apply Style gt Normal gt Times New Roman 3 12 pt A aa BR i This sample toolbar has four menus Your Webmaster determines e which menus are available to you e which buttons appear on each menu and the sequence in which they appear initially e whether or not you are authorized to customize your toolbar If you
77. press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Attributes Fa Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size E I Highlight Cancel Redo Standard Toolbar Button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 353 Editing Images Description If you use the Undo command and then decide that it was a mistake use this command It re applies the changes from the command that occurred before you pressed Undo See Also Undo on page 362 Reset Zoom Ratio Standard Toolbar Button ra Description Displays image at full size See Also Zoom In on page 363 Zoom Out on page 363 Rotate Standard Toolbar Button gA Description Turns an image a specified number of degrees Note that the dialog box lets you rotate the image e left or right e 90 180 or 270 degrees e any number of degrees between 1 and 359 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 354 Editing Images Dialog Box w Rotate JOf x C 180 270 fao 1 355 cre Save Standard Toolbar Button Description Save changes to an image If required information is missing such as the image name you are prompted for this information Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 355 Editing Images Dialog Box Save Image As ea Save ini ADOBEAPP image gear Program Files EDE C Inetpub CI PSFONTS CFUSION Install L System Volume Config Msi OnE di
78. tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Change to the following state Archive Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column On every View Task page you can sort tasks by the Task Type assigned to the task You sort by Task Type using the Show Task Type drop down box It is located in the upper right corner of the workarea Note Task Types only appear in the Show Task Type dropdown box when they have been added to a task Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 228 Managing Tasks Show Task Type yue Date Assia Ai Not Specified E l Mar 2005 Mar 2005 eview 1 Mar 2005 Prep To sort by Task Type click the drop down box and choose a Task Type Words in bold Italics are Task Categories You cannot sort by Task Categories Sorting Tasks By Column On every View Tasks page you can sort the information by most columns Information can be sorted by the following Title Alphabetically by title of associated content block Content block ID number By task state from first to last Priority By task priority High appears first followed by Normal then Low Due Date By due date beginning with dates closest to today Assigned To Alphabetically by user to whom the task is assigned Note Once set a task s assigned to user does not change throughout the life of the task
79. tevcecadocuaunaaaosbaenemnncnanciensisececacecumemenenseas 413 Creating a Hyperlink tinsisisatsiavesivannisiasivissandesssnenasandiavaddinieniiunat 413 Using a Quicklink sissisodan eE 414 Entering a Hyperlink Manually sciisissi merece seiepieatiaeninranrennveaiaivess 415 Testing a Hyperlink ss sasnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn a 416 Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page 417 Editing a Hyperlink s ssassnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn n 418 Removing a Hyperlink sssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 418 Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink 00006 418 Working with TW Ws conte vocuradsandetacenacentanpeesavesdciscyiwantuanedecncens 419 Viewing and Editing HTML cssscsssssessssseeeenseseseneneeeaeeens 419 Editing a Sechon Ol a Page cishccicccpcsarsesctectenmiqsneeaneceeesseniesiaen 420 nSeriing SOUCO erisnimi in Be en entn one ne NS nEa enn S Erne 420 Cleaning Source Code siissidivcsssnesstsrevsvsenscussacaiiaeserseesteeexecusuads 421 Inserting Content from MS Office 2000 cccsesseeseees 421 Section 508 Compliance ccceseeeeseeeeneeceneeeeesesenseees 422 Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XM L 0008 422 Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse 00008 423 Section 508 Tables scald eee scieecccie aaia 425 Editing XML Web Pages sssssssssssessessess
80. the folder in the report When you do the report redisplays showing only content blocks in that folder Performing an Action on Several Content Blocks You can perform the following actions on several or all content blocks in the Approvals Checked in and Checked out reports Report Action you can perform Checked in Submit for publication Checked out Check in To select several reports check the relevant checkboxes illustrated below To select all reports click Select All Content Reports Checked Out Content Report Select All Clear All Title ID Last Editar Date Modified P Home Page Content 1 Administrator Application 03 Jun 2004 12 05 PM W Testing edit summary button1 34 Administrator Application 07 Jun 2004 12 47 PM 4 Testing edit summary button 33 inChief Editor 07 Jun 2004 12 46 PM i Private Content 2 Administrator 4oplication 03 Jun 2004 10 11 AM L Trinity In Line Pipe 22 Edit John 08 Jun 2004 03 13 PM Wo New marketing block 30 BUILTIN BUILTIN 01 Jul 2004 12 05 PM 4h Plastic Molder 123 13 BUILTIN BUILTIN 07 Jun 2004 03 28 PM 4 RC International Ships RC Sportster 9 Edit John 08 Jun 2004 03 44 PM 4h Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 104 Content Workflow Reports Then click the button at the top left to perform the action on the selected content blocks Viewing Editing Content Blocks on the Report To view and possibly edit any content block on a report click it It app
81. the following subtopics e Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 214 e Creating the Task via the Task Folder on page 215 e Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 220 Accessing the Tasks Folder To access the Tasks folder follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop as explained in Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 14 2 The Smart Desktop folders appear in the top left frame D Smart Desktop 5 Tasks H Reports 3 Click the Tasks folder The following subfolders appear e Assigned To Me tasks assigned to you e Assigned By Me tasks you assigned to someone else e Created By Me tasks you created e Assigned To User search for tasks assigned to a user e Not Started tasks whose state is set to not started e Active tasks whose state is set to Active e Awaiting Data tasks whose state is set to Awaiting Data e On Hold tasks whose state is set to On Hold e Pending tasks whose state is set to Pending e Reopened tasks whose state is set to Reopened e Complete tasks whose state is set to Reopened You can click any folder to view only tasks in that category Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 214 Managing Tasks Also the View Tasks screen appears in the right frame listing all tasks assigned to you or assigned by you View Tasks Assigned By and To John Edit cr we Show Task Type ALL e Title ID State Priority Due Date Assigned To Assig
82. this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the textarea field e Name e Value e Default is Checked mi Inserts a check box For example Check box lt input type checkbox checked checked name mycheckbox gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the check box e Name e Value e Default is Checked Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 288 Toolbar Buttons EE Inserts a selection box For example a Select box lt select multiple multiple size 25 name myselectbox gt lt option value optionl gt optionl lt option gt lt option value option2 gt option2 lt option gt lt select gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the select box Name Size the number of characters in the field If a user s entry exceeds the size the field scrolls to the right Allow multiple determines if a user responding to this selection box can choose more than one option Option name the internal value assigned to this option Display name the user sees this text in the selection box This dialog also has three buttons described below Add lets you add a new option to the selection box Change lets you change the selected option s option name or display name Delete removes option from selection list Note that you can place a check mark next to an
83. to the creator notifying him her Decline E that the content was declined 2 Removes the content from the approval chain Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 85 Approving Declining Content Blocks Description Invokes the editor The approver can make changes to the content block After reviewing the content the EditorlnChief decides it is great and publishes it At this point the content block becomes live on the Web site and the approval chain is complete The user who created the content block receives an email notifying him that it was published Content changes have been made an File Edit View Tools Message Help wo w e a a gt g Reply Reply Al Forward Print Delete Previous Jext Seen Fron Webmaster our compar com Date Friday May 03 2002 4 22 PM To Sports rite ourcompany com Subject Content changes have been made The changes to the content Eed Sox Win World Senes have been approved The content changes went live imme diately Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 86 Comparing Versions of a Content Block Comparing Versions of a Content Block The View Content Difference feature highlights changes that were made to a selected content block Below is an example of the View Content Difference screen showing two versions of a content block The changes are indicated by e redlining deleted content e highlighting in yellow ad
84. track assets by status Report Displays assets in this status Approvals Requiring your approval Approvals Reports on page 105 Checked In Content Checked in Checked In Report on page 107 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 260 Using the Asset Management System Checked Out Content Checked out Checked Out Report on page 108 New Content New that is created and saved New Content Report on page 109 but never published Submitted Content Submitted for publication Submitted Report on page 109 Pending Content Approved and pending a start date Content Pending Start Date Report on page 111 Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached Refresh Reminder Report on page 111 Expired Content Expired date has been reached Expired Content Report on page 112 Content to Expire Will expire within specified number Content to Expire Report on of days page 113 For more information see Content Workflow Reports on page 101 Using the CMS AMS Search See Search Content Folder on page 45 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 261 Updating Your User Profile Updating Your User Profile When a new user is added to an Ektron CMS300 Web site the administrator sets up a personal profile for him It contains information such as password and email address You can update some personal profile information when needed This section explains how to modify
85. utility which was delivered with this download 2 4 Screen appears Copy the serverIo from the top text field 3 Email to Jicense ektron com the seryerID with your request for a server k You can use the host application to edit the file then switch to the View Content screen to insert information such as summary and search data Use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions such as view history submit for publishing and delete For more information see Working with Managed Files on page 252 security For the purposes of security assets are treated like content blocks Your system administrator applies security to each folder determining which user groups can perform which tasks on the contents of the folder For more information see the Setting Permissions chapter of the Ektron CMS300 Administrator Manual Working with Office Documents This section explains how to work with MS Office documents through the following subtopics e Notes on Working with Office Documents on page 240 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 239 Using the Asset Management System e Creating a New Office Document on page 240 e Importing One Office Document into the AMS on page 245 e Importing Several Office Documents into the AMS on page 247 e Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 249 e The Work Offline Option on page 250 e Editing an Office Document on page 250 N
86. your personal profile Viewing Your Profile Before changing your personal profile you must view it To do so follow these steps 1 Access your Smart Desktop See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 14 From the lower left frame click Settings From the top left frame click User Profile Settings A user Profile 44 Help 4 Your user profile appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 262 Updating Your User Profile view User Information jedit Username jedit First Name John Last Name Edit User Language App Default E Mail Address None Specified System Notifications Receiving of E Mail Disabled System notification sending email is currently disabled Preferences are locked by the CMS Work Page Size Width 7900p Height o80px i Display button text in the title bar Landing Page after login Refresh the login page iM Set smart desktop as the start location in the workare This User currently belongs to these User Groups Everyone Task permissions Create Task 5 Click the Edit button in the top left corner Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 263 Updating Your User Profile 6 The Edit User Information screen appears The following table explains fields you can edit ee Se Password If desired enter a new password into this field If you change your password you do not need to log out then log back in Ho
87. 0 assigns a status to each content block The status determines what you can do with a content block and indicates what must occur in order for it to get published to the web site For more information see Appendix A Content Statuses on page 442 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 7 Logging In and Out Logging In and Out This section explains how to log in and out of Ektron CMS300 and to use the site preview feature through the following subtopics e Prerequisites on page 8 e Logging into the Sample Web Site on page 8 e Site Preview on page 10 e Logging Out of the Sample Site on page 11 Prerequisites Once your Webmaster or administrator installs Ektron CMS300 you need the following items before you can use it e URL Web address of Ektron CMS300 Web site e Username and password Once you acquire both you can log into Ektron CMS300 and begin managing Web site content NOTE This documentation uses the Ektron CMS300 sample Web site to demonstrate the product Logging into the Sample Web Site To access the Ektron CMS300 sample site Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 8 Logging In and Out 1 In your Web browser navigate to the URL of your Ektron CMS300 Web site Your system administrator provides this 2 Click Login at the top right corner of the screen Login Contact Ektron 3 The login screen appears RG ve manonal Home Products Supp
88. 00 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 369 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Insert Table Inserts a new table where the Creating a Table on page 366 cursor is Currently resting Insert Row Creates a new table row above the Adding or Removing Rows and row in which the cursor is currently Columns on page 377 resting Insert Column Creates a new table column next to Adding or Removing Rows and the column in which the cursor is Columns on page 377 currently resting Insert Cell Inserts a cell to the left of the cursor in a table Delete Rows Deletes table row in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 377 Delete Column Deletes table column in which the Adding or Removing Rows and cursor is currently resting Columns on page 377 Delete Cells Deletes the selected cells a Merge Cells Combines the contents of two or Merging Two Cells on page 405 more selected cells into one Split Cell Divides a cell into two Each cell Splitting a Cell on page 404 occupies one half the size of the Original cell Table Properties Displays and lets you edit table The Table Properties Dialog Box on properties such as the number of page 371 rows and columns cell padding and borders Cell Properties Displays and lets you edit cell The Cell Properties Dialog Box on properties such a
89. 112 new 109 pending start date 111 refresh reminder 111 sorting and filtering 103 submitted 109 viewing content blocks 105 workflow 101 folder accessing 101 restore toolbar button 30 restoring content 99 right to left editing 283 rotate WeblmageFX command 354 rows table adding 377 deleting 377 spanning 399 specifying 376 S save toolbar button 30 WeblmageFX command 355 save as WeblmageFX command 356 scanning an image 361 scheduling content 57 search 304 considering case of search term 306 content folder 45 direction 305 library 119 toolbar button 30 whole word match 307 search data creating 72 definition 68 editing 72 section 508 compliance 422 tables 425 select all menu option 300 select WeblmageFX command 357 selecting text 276 server moving picture to 329 sharpen WeblmageFX command 357 shortcuts keyboard 277 show calendar toolbar button 30 Smart Desktop definition 14 hiding left panel 20 modifying folder display 18 navigating 17 set as start location for user 266 Smart Detect field eWebDiff 91 space character inserting 282 spacing cell 407 spanning table columns 399 table rows 399 special characters inserting 282 spelling Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 check a single word 310 check as you type 308 check on demand 309 check selected text 310 checking file addresses 311 checking Internet addresses 311 checking uppercase words 311 checking w
90. 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 Initiator Activity Information jedit Creation jedit Other Task 4s5signed to All Authors jedit Content Linked Plastic Molder 12313 jedit Start Date Changed Date Set to 17 Sep 2004 jedit Due Date Change Date Set to 22 Sep 2004 jedit Start Date Changed Date Set to 17 Sep 2004 jedit Due Date Change Date Set to 22 Sep 2004 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 234 Managing Tasks Task Module Toolbar The following table explains the toolbar buttons available while managing tasks Add Comment Add a comment to the task Adding Comments to Tasks on page 230 a Add Task Access the Add Task screen from the Task Module Toolbar View Content page on page 235 oy Add Task Access Add Task screen from task Creating the Task via module folder the Task Folder on page 215 It io fi Delete Task Delete a task Deleting a Task on page 233 E Edit Task Edit a task Editing a Task on page 230 Save Save task information i Update Save task information al al View Task View task information Viewing a Task on page 224 E amp Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 235 Using the Asset Management System IMPORTANT The Asset Management System is a separate add on module that requires its own license Please contact Ektron Sales for details sales ektron com The Asset Management System AMS lets you import Microsoft Office documents a
91. 300 through the following topics e Supported Types of Assets on page 237 e Security on page 239 e Working with Office Documents on page 239 e Working with Managed Files on page 252 e Asset Workflow on page 259 e Viewing AMS Assets within the CMS on page 259 e Deleting an AMS Asset on page 260 e Approving AMS Assets on page 260 e Adding Assets to Collections and Menus on page 260 e Asset Reports on page 260 Supported Types of Assets e Microsoft Office 2000 or later documents Word Excel Powerpoint Project Publisher Visio etc e Managed files any Windows executable file such as zip files PDFs txt files graphic files such as gif and jpeg etc NOTE The file types available for upload are determined by your administrator If you try to upload a file that is not available you will see the following error message File Type Not Supported File type not supported only file types supported are doc xls ppt pdf gif jpg jpeg txt log vsd dot zip Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 237 Using the Asset Management System Office Documents You can edit any Office document within the Content tab just like an HTML content block The host application s tooloar appears below Ektron CMS300 s tabs on the Edit Content screen Edit Content Title a English fU 5 4 i Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Content Se
92. 4 Click the down arrow to the right of the font size list When you do the list of available fonts appears 5 Click 5 18 pt 6 Notice that large size is now much larger than the other text Congratulations You have just created your first Web page with eWebEditPro XML You have learned how to apply bold italic and underlining create a hyperlink add a bullet to a line and change the size of the text This sample used only a few of the many features available The following sections explain the rest of the details about using the product Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 275 Toolbar Buttons This section explains how to use the buttons and drop down lists on the toolbar The toolbar is the row of buttons across the top of the editor window illustrated below 2 C M8 Soe Fe Aee Aam 4B la amp Apply Style Normal Times New Roman 3 12 pt z A J E Z U M WL Til d nbsp TM hs The buttons let you perform functions such as cutting and pasting text inserting images and creating tables All buttons may not appear Your Webmaster determines which buttons appear on your toolbar Also you can customize your toolbar so that it contains only the buttons you use See Customizing Your Toolbar on page 291 This section explains e Selecting Text e Applying Formatting Attributes to Text e Table of Toolbar Buttons and Drop Down Lists sele
93. 57 Using the Asset Management System Edit Content Title topic links English U 5 3 Content Summary Metadata Schedule select file to be uploaded File C DOCUME 1 BBOLT 1 EKMLOC Save To Local Edit in App 8 To open the managed file in the host application click Edit in App Then make your changes save it in the host application and click either the Check in Ei or Submit for Publishing button 5 lf you want to save this version of the file to your computer click Save to Local If you do a window appears Navigate to the desired folder then click the Save button lf you want to select another file on your computer or network and save it under this name in Ektron CMS300 click Browse If you do a window appears Navigate to the desired folder then click the Open button The new file is saved under the old Ektron CMS300 name 9 Edit the managed file as well as its summary search data schedule tasks or comments See Also e Adding a Content Block Summary on page 64 e Adding or Editing Search Data on page 68 e Managing Tasks on page 213 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 57 10 Save the file within the host application Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 258 Using the Asset Management System 11 Check in or submit the file for publishing as you would any content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 243 Asset
94. 6 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 75 Approving Declining Content Blocks Approving Declining Content Blocks Your site administrator establishes an approval chain for each folder or even specific content blocks The approval chain is a list of people or groups who must approve a new or edited content block before it is published to the Web site If a user group Is part of an approval chain any member of the group can approve the content The administrator also determines the sequence of approvers in the chain When a new or edited content block is submitted to the approval chain it is reviewed by users who may e change it e approve or decline it e publish it to the Internet it is published when the last user approves it The chart below illustrates the approval process Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 76 Approving Declining Content Blocks Approval Chain Publish to Web site You can approve and decline all content blocks that have been submitted to you from the approval folder The following topics guide you through the approval or decline of these content blocks Edit e Approve Decline One Content Block on page 77 e Approve Decline Several Content Blocks on page 79 e Example of an Approval Chain on page 79 Approve Decline One Content Block 1 Click the Smart Desktop button circled in red below len eet ed ee ee 2 Click Reports 3 Click A
95. 6 Click the Delete button 1 Reordering Collections List After a collection is created and more than one content block is assigned to it you can reorder the collections list To do so follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 139 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 142 3 Click the Reorder button 4 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 151 Working with Collections 4 The Reorder Collection screen appears Reorder Collection Support Packages First Cnternal Support Policies RC International Support ha Support Request Form Click the content block whose order you want to change Click the up or down arrow to move the content block in either direction 7 Repeat steps five and six until you set the desired order 8 Click the Update button i Editing Collection Information To edit information about a collection follow these steps 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 139 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 142 Click the collection whose information you want to
96. 7 386 Manipulating Your Table s Format Deleting a Background Image 1 Move the cursor to any cell on the table and right click the mouse 2 Click Table Properties from the menu ut apy Baste Select All Insert Ao Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columna Menge Welle Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HTML View as HTML 3 Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt 4 Click OK setting Table Borders You can specify a border color or size for your table Assigning Border Color A table border is the line that separates the table from the rest of your Web page By default table borders are gray You can change the color of table borders Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 387 Manipulating Your Table s Format table border Waris checked cell border lf you want a table s border to disappear set it to the same color as the page s background color This technique is often used to format text on a Web page Assigning a Cell Border Color Each cell also has a border that separates it from the other cells and the table border By default a cell s border color matches the table border However you can individually change a cell border color see Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 394 To assign a color to your table s border click the Bor
97. 8 20 AME animation sw comparison BE My Pictures Ink 1KB Shortcut 12 7 200 H a CMS topics gm SC chapter revisions doc 25KB Microsoft Word Document 1 24 20 may ewebeditpra Oe Special Features doc 24KB Microsoft Word Document 11 18 20 eee framemaker correspondence Oe steve changes to 300 setup m 33KB Microsoft Word Document 12 13 el A help test Oe Suggestion For Improving Task 44 KBE Microsoft Word Document ele 4i20 es laos 8 Inthe left frame navigate to the folder that contains the files you want import 9 Inthe right frame click the checkbox next to each file you want to import You can only import files in the selected folder at this time 10 In the Title field you can enter an optional title to apply to all imported documents See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 249 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 248 Using the Asset Management System 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable See Also Add to Quicklinks Table on page 39 and Content Searchable on page 39 12 Click the Check in Ei or Submit for Publishing button 7 See Also Adding a Content Block on page 37 and Save Check in and Publish on page 243 13 The selected files are imported into AMS Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once lf you import files one at a time you can assign each file
98. 87 Approve Decline Several Content Blocks To approve several submitted content blocks without reviewing them follow these steps 1 Select the submitted content blocks you want to approve as described in Approve Decline One Content Block on page 77 2 Click the Approve All button I 3 The following message appears Microsoft Internet Explorer E ie x P This action will approve all the selected content changes awaiting your approval wd This may cause some content blocks to become published or deleted Do you wish to continue To continue click OK The approved content blocks are either submitted to the next publisher published immediately to the Web site or deleted depending on the approval chain set for each content block Example of an Approval Chain The approval chain begins when a content contributor submits a new or edited content block If email is enabled an email is sent to the next approver in the approval chain Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 79 Approving Declining Content Blocks The following example follows a typical content block from creation to publication Three users make up this approval chain e Sports Writer creates sports content e Sports Editor edits and publishes all sports articles e Editor In Chief edits and publishes all articles Each user has different permissions that correspond to their roles The example uses the following topics to
99. A scroll bar appears at the bottom of the browser The user must move the scroll bar to see the rest of the table Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help a EN Search Netscape Back Reload Home Table Properties If you set table width by pixels do not set it to more than 610 pixels Otherwise the table will not fully display on a monitor set to low resolution 640 x 480 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 381 Manipulating Your Table s Format Setting Table Width by Pixels To specify table width by pixels choose Pixels in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the number of pixels at the Width field Insert Table Size Rows 2 Columns 2 Layout C Percent fe Pixels Specifying Horizontal Alignment You can specify your table s horizontal alignment left right or center within the browser Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 382 Manipulating Your Table s Format center If you specify right or left justify you can wrap text around the table To do this move the cursor to the right or left of the table and begin typing Table Properties In this example the table is left justified so this text appears to the right of the table Specify the table alignment at the Horizontal Alignment field on the Layout area of the Insert Table dialog box Layout Width i oig
100. APPrOVET occseccicsidssicuendinssiesasidesadnde ia aia aiaei 83 Comparing Versions of a Content Block 05 87 When Can I Compare Content cccscccesseseeseeseneeeeeneneaees 87 The Compare Content WINdOW cccessseesesseeseeseeseeesenseees 88 TOD ener Reet Oot ee E er ee Ree Tere 89 First Use of the View Content Difference Feature 93 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks 94 Accessing Content History ccccesssesesseeseenseesenseeseeneeseens 94 The Content History Wind OW ccccssecssesseeceeseeseeseeseenseeseees 96 Viewing a Historical Version of a Content Block 05 97 Restoring a Previous Version ccccscssesseceeseseeseeseneeeeeseeennenes 99 Comparing Historical VersionS ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 99 Removing Applied XSLT cccsssccssseesceseeeeeeseeeeeseeseenseesenees 99 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 ii Content Workflow Report scccsseesesseessenseseeeees 101 Sorting and Filtering Content Reports ccccccsseseeeeeseenees 103 Approvals eae rettae eaters cen ssiexnsanansins ndeesnsiecemsenrsdesvedadrexses 105 Checked In REPOTI eee 107 Checked Out Report sassnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nna 108 New Content Report asssssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 109 Submitted FRED Oi epainiesp
101. Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item on page 168 Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 169 Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 169 Adding a Content Block as a Menu Item To add a content block as a menu item follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 164 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 165 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 166 You can only add content blocks that reside in the menu s content folder or its subfolders NOTE 2 Click the circle next to Content Block 3 Click the Next button 4 The Add New item screen appears listing all content blocks in the folder and its subfolders in which you created the menu Click any folder to display its content blocks Check all content blocks you want to add to the menu Click the Add Item button EP The View Menu screen reappears showing the new content blocks oN DO Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 167 9 Working with Menus Click the Edit icon next to each new content block to access the Edit Menu Item screen This screen lets you assign additional information to the menu item such as the target window See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item To add a library asset as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these
102. After Set an End Date If you set an end date to a content block and it gets published to your Web site the content is visible on the Web site When a content block reaches its end date you have three choices for what to do with it These are explained in Setting Archive Options on page 61 lf your choice means the content will not appear on the Web site Ektron recommends having another content block ready to replace it If not and a site visitor goes to the page containing the content he sees the template without the content block Appearance on Content Reports After a content block reaches its end date it appears on the Expired Content report which helps you keep track of expired content See Also Expired Content Report on page 112 Also the Content to Expire report lists all content blocks whose end date will occur within a number of days that you specify See Also Content to Expire Report on page 113 setting Archive Options After setting an End Date you can specify a content block s archive options which determine how it is handled upon reaching the end date time To be eligible for any option the content must reach its end date time progress through its approval chain and be published Until those events occur the content block remains visible both within its content folder and on the site The archive options illustrated below appear below the Start Date and End Date fields on the content
103. BBRA ooye eeel as mBall amp Apply Style Normal Times New Roman 3 12 pt g A J E 7 UA nbsp 2 TH i This is some sample content You can make the text bold a e or underlined with the push of a button You can also easily add hyperlinks You can begin a line with bullets Finally you can change the text to a large SIze Notice that this page has the following elements e The second sentence includes bold italic and underlined text e The third sentence includes a hyperlink text that will jump to another Web page when the user clicks on it e The fourth sentence begins with a bullet Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 272 Creating a Simple Web Page The last sentence has some very large 18 point text Creating the Sample Web Page To create this page follow these steps Enter the First Two Sentences 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Your Webmaster installs eWebEditPro XML on your computer and determines which fonts and sizes are available Your system may not match the example below Type the first two sentences This is some sample content You can make text bold italic and underlined with the push of a button Double click the word bold to select it Then click the Bold button to apply bold to the word Double click the word italic Then click the Italic button to apply italic to the word Double click the word underlined Then clic
104. Check off the content block you created and other content blocks E Flot RE LIT IC O Syndication if Contact Ektron 1 Login Information 2 in New Content Block 1 13 Click the Add button FA to add the content blocks to the collection Editing Content Blocks in a Collection After a collection is created you can add or remove content block links to and from it Adding Content Blocks to the Collection For information about adding content block links to a collection see Assigning Content Blocks to the Collection on page 147 Removing Content Blocks from the Collection To remove acontent block link from a collection follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 150 Working with Collections 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 139 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 142 Click the Remove button 1 The Delete Items from Collection screen appears Click boxes next to links that you want to delete Select All Clear All Title ID UR Home Page Content 1 JCI L Support Page B ja W Plastic Molder 123 13 CI L RC Cheetah 5 CI RC Redstar 7 CI as Contact Ektron 15 ja New Content Block i17 a Click Select All to select all boxes Click Clear All to remove all check marks
105. Checked Out 1 Tasks 2 Tasks and Content Reports Popular reports and tasks this section also displays content block Information e The right frame displays Content awaiting approval content blocks that you need to approve before they proceed to the next approver or be published if you are the final approver See Also Approvals Reports on page 105 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 15 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Content currently checked out all content in a checked out status This content cannot be edited by other users until the user who checked it out or the system administrator checks it in See Also Checked Out Report on page 108 A list of tasks assigned to you See Also Managing Tasks on page 213 The Content to Expire Report see Content to Expire Report on page 113 NOTE The number to the right of each category lists the quantity of content blocks in that category for you When you click an item up to five content blocks in a category appear To perform tasks on those content blocks and to view additional blocks in that category click the category lf you select a folder from the left frame the right frame displays content blocks in that folder If you select a content block from the list information about it fills the right frame e The top left frame displays the folder tree for the Smart Desktop folder which has two sub fo
106. Creating Summaries There are two ways to create summaries e for anew content block see Creating a Summary on a New Content Block on page 65 e for an existing content see Creating a Summary for an Existing Content Block on page 66 Creating a Summary on a New Content Block 1 Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the content 2 Click the Add Content button The Add Content screen appears Ey NS alte h ERI ERA AEA A AAAS O EEA IAEE A A EEA ST AA A NTT TEE EETA a A Lel opl 0 Fa j orale aa Comment Li W Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Start Date ES End Date ae Apply Style Normal Verdana gt 2 10 pt hi A J E 7 U CALE IE 3 Insert a Title and content See Also Adding a Content Block on page 37 Click the Summary tab Enter summary information for the content block The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 65 Adding a Content Block Summary 6 When done click the appropriate button Creating a Summary for an Existing Content Block Navigate to the folder that contains the content Click the content block The View Content screen appears e SS Click the Summary tab to enter or edit summary information for the content block The summary can include images files and hyperlinks Its length can
107. Custom Tag Properties dialog box is documented in the Developer Reference Guide section Custom XML Dialog Boxes Insert Custom Tag Fa Cancel Knowledge Baze Article More Information References Ete Resolution Properties Summary Symptoms This article applies to Title ele Inserting an Available Tag To insert any tag from the current schema or DTD follow these steps Click the tag from the Tags column Click Insert The Custom Tag Attributes dialog appears To learn how to use that see The Custom Tag Attributes Dialog on page 433 Inserting a New Tag To insert a new tag follow these steps 1 Click New 2 Anew line is added to the top of the Tags column to make room for the new attribute Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 436 Editing XML Web Pages Insert Custom Tag Fa Insert Cancel Tags Hew Book Section Book Title Melet Catalog Listing description Ereapenies Mam Character Place Hame s catalog 3 Enter the attribute into the new line circled in the illustration above 4 Press Insert to close the dialog box and insert the tag NOTE If you insert some new tags to this screen and then decide you do not want to insert one of them click the unwanted tag and press the_Delete button to remove it from the list Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 437 Inserting Comments within Content While editing Ek
108. Hyperlink 0 Make the Hyperlink active l Launch link in a new browser Events Avallable Selected spring tuition due april vacation g 5 Respond to the fields using the following table as a reference Event Title Enter a title for the event Note If you enter a quicklink in the Hyperlink field the quicklink s content block title replaces this title You can then edit the new title if desired Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 201 Working with Calendars Pea Pesenmton If desired enter a location for the event for example Conference Room 1 or Cafeteria Event Location One Time Recurring If you want to enter a one time only event continue reading If you want to add a recurring event see Adding a Recurring Event on page 203 Click the calendar icon 7 to display a calendar From it select a start date Start Time Select a start time for the event Select an end time for the event Check this box if you want the calendar to display the event s start and end times illustrated below Display the times for the event 16 EA S birthday party Location Hew York koom Start 1 00 PM End 3 00 PM Hyperlink You can link a Web page to this calendar event The Web page could contain more information about the event directions to it etc If you insert a hyperlink when this event appears on the calendar the reader can click the event to jump to that page
109. M oe Published Date 01 Dec 2003 11 12 AM 26 Nov 2003 02 13 PM E E 26 Nov 2002 02 13 pm History Comment This is what the user will see when they visit our sample site Approver List E admin Content Title Home Fage Content Metadata Title Welcome to RC International Keywords Re International RC racing remote control airplanes cars Summary Welcome to RC International Content Welcome to RC International When viewing a historical version of a content block you can perform three actions Restore ep Restore historical version of Restoring a Previous content block Version on page 99 Compare Compare historical version of Comparing Historical content block to current version Versions on page 99 Remove XSLT Remove XSLT applied to XML Removing Applied XSLT on XML Content Only content block page 99 Each task is explained below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 98 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks Restoring a Previous Version NOTE The ability to restore a content block is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Restore button Ep on the View Content History screen you do not have permission to do so 1 Select an historical version of the content that you want to restore as described in Viewing a Historical Version of a Content Block on page 97 2 Click the Restore button Er The content history window closes
110. ML Configuration For more information see the Managing XML chapter of the Ektron CMS300 Administrator s manual 6 Click the Save button Deleting Folders You can delete folders that are no longer needed NOTE The ability to delete a folder is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete Folder button SF on the View Contents of Folder screen you do not have permission to do so CAUTION Deleting a content folder permanently deletes its content blocks quicklinks and sub folders Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 55 Working with Folders and Content Blocks To delete a content folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to the content folder you want to delete Click the Delete Folder button i A confirmation message appears If you are sure you want to delete the content folder click OK The screen is refreshed and the folder is deleted a eS y Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 56 Scheduling Content to Begin and End scheduling Content to Begin and End Scheduling content lets you control when a content block becomes visible on the Web site Similarly you can remove a content block on a predetermined date and time When used together a start and end date can relieve you of much work by managing how long a content block is viewable on your Web site You can also set options for what happens to a content block after reaching its
111. MS300Sample index asp id 1 Support Page 8 CMS300Sample index asp 7id 8 Plastic Molder 123 13 J CMS300Sample index asp 7id 13 RC Cheetah 5 CMS300Sample index asp id 5 RC Redstar 7 CMS300Sample index asp id 7 I7 New Content Block CMS300Sample index asp id 17 Contact Ektron 15 CMS300Sample index asp id 15 To toggle between a default template and quicklinks follow these steps 1 Access the Edit Collection screen for the collection you want to edit 2 Modify the Template field 3 Click the Save il button Assigning Content Blocks to the Collection After a collection is created your next step is to assign content blocks to it To do so follow these steps NOTE When viewing a Collection on the Web site the last published version of a content block appears If a content block has never been published nothing appears 1 Access the collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 139 2 Access the View Collection Screen as described in Viewing a Collection on page 142 3 Click the collection to which you want to assign content blocks Lis Title New rl 4 The View Collection screen appears i z 5 Click the Add button 4 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 147 Working with Collections 6 The Add Items to Collection screen appears displaying con
112. Management System You can carry out any option by clicking an Ektron CMS300 toolbar button Edit Content ora Document Management menu option illustrated below gt Ba lS me Sl Wo fa Se Tithe test English U 5 Content Search Data Comment Tasks File Edit View Insert Format Tools Table Help iti tilal tertile Unde CheckOuk Check In Publish Save To Document Server work offline Properties Document Toolbar Management Menu button Option Check document in so you and others Check in can continue to edit it Submit document into approval chain Publish or submit for Upon approval publish content to Web publishing site Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 244 Using the Asset Management System Document Toolbar Management Menu button Option Save recent changes Use to save latest Save to DocServer changes before continuing Save file to local computer Work Offline ma See Also The Work Offline Option on page 250 Discard changes made in current editing Undo Check out x session Importing One Office Document into the AMS Your computer or network may have Office documents that you want to manage using the AMS Follow these steps to import any document into Ektron s AMS See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 249 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to plac
113. Mar 2005 01 14 6 Click the Add Several Files button Is Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 255 Using the Asset Management System 7 The View Contents of Folder screen splits in two resembling Windows Explorer The left section displays the folder structure of your PC and its network drives The right section displays the contents of the current folder Edit Content Title English U 5 4 M Add to Quicklinks table M Content Searchable Content Search Data Schedule H a Favorites Modified a My Documents O Ps application error upon checkin of word SKB 3 8 2005 2 06 3 ni _ Camtasia Studio O msg at beg of installation aif SKB 10 22 2004 11 2 x L My eBooks O untitled gif 11KB 12 21 2004 4 38 2 7 caes O approval method aif 12KB 7 22 2004 5 04 1 a HCJ My Webs CI editfolder_properties gif Z1 K6 6 14 2004 4 13 huf WebWorks Proje C dental patient example gif 202 KB 4 29 2004 5 30 GQ Start Menu C Sample jpg 1OKB 4 28 2004 6 40 H YiewletBuilder 8 Inthe left frame navigate to the folder that contains the files you want import 9 Inthe right frame click the checkbox next to each file you want to import You can only import files in the selected folder NOTE If you select both Office documents and managed files the Office documents are imported as Office documents and others are imported as managed files 10 In the Title field enter a title for all import
114. New Men acs iccetimiest trees pansveecenseseneecen teak iets ietineeeeees 160 Adding a Menu ltem wccictnds atscuceretzingontaceacacenunsocuasgebissadaneaeeeetetadesanes 164 Adding a New Content Block to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web a AN TEE ENEA A EA ENTI E P NE E AA EEEE AEE 171 Fale Hig 8 a NO pa AEE 172 aI a Nonii NOM tanta ventineaiiorennneaueeneuietaannennpme R E 173 Editing Types of Menu Items sinsivierciinresseeratiarsabapedelarearmanebrece 176 Viewing a MenU s srrriirrssnsisiasisrerieiniidsian iini iirin khar nEn Ehki erne iE 179 Reordering Menu ltemS spccctiesneasacentdcasnncvus sessudnsddectensnevenebensonenees 184 patino a MONU srren EER Rn aaa E 185 DESTIN a Moni MEM rensas eE 186 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System 00000000000000 187 Working with Calendars c sscessseeeseeeeeeceseeeneseees 190 Understanding Calendars cccccssseessssseeceeseeseeneeseensenseans 191 Accessing the View Calendar Screen ccsssseessseseeseenees 193 VIEWING a Calendar cressianssncnrstsmmeesadieledsxenevesinnshiiwrnicdesercimescaseecs 197 Adding a Calendar Event ccccccsseccseseesenseeceeseeseenseesensees 199 Understanding Event Types ccccsccceccsseeeeeseseeeeeeeseeseeeeeessaaes 203 Adding a Recurring EVEN wiscsce ses cescantacepeciactpuetindieancenaaieebserenesetsssaueds 203 Adding a New Content Block for a Calendar Event 205 Viewing a Calendar Event
115. Quicklink or Form to Content After a new content block is created users can insert a quicklink or form to it into any other content block To do so follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 130 The only difference is that you add a quicklink or form instead of a file Be sure to place the cursor where you want the quicklink or form to appear before inserting it When the quicklink or form is inserted the title of the jumped to content block appears in the content To Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 135 Library Folder test the quicklink or form select the newly inserted title and double Click it When the page is published a reader can click the link to jump to the quicklink or form page Viewing Quicklinks or Forms To view a quicklink or form follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 123 The only difference is that you view a quicklink or form instead of a file The table below describes each field on the quicklinks display Field Deseripton Title given to the hyperlink or form by the user who added it or last edited it URL Link URL link for the quicklink or form Library ID ID number assigned automatically by Ektron CMS300 when the quicklink or form was originally added Parent Folder Parent folder that the quicklink or form belongs to Users need permissions to this folder to be able to access the quicklink or form Last User t
116. T e en F a D Library itle ES Forms 7 Human Resour s Marketing fama s5 Products auperinks Ha support images aE Syndication quicklinks 3 A list of files copied to the Library root folder appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 121 Library Folder 4 Click the Add Library button fi 5 The Add File screen appears Add Library Item to Folder Contenti files Rag Title Filename P P Browse Search Data Mot Included Included All gt gt Keyword Alc lt lt Category No Selection selection Featured T sell by date TS Reguired fields Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 122 Library Folder 6 Enter the necessary information according to the following table Field Deseripton OO Enter a title for the file to be copied Filename Enter the folder path to the file to be copied You can use the Browse button to help you find the file If defined by your system administrator one or more search data fields appear These fields let you assign search data to the selected library file Users performing a library search can use these criteria to find library items See Also Searching the Library on page 119 Below is a description of the buttons on the screen Button Name Description Browse Browse through the computer or network for the Preview View the file to make sure it s correct before
117. THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT THAT YOU UNDERSTAND THIS AGREEMENT AND UNDERSTAND THAT BY CONTINUING THE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE BY LOADING OR RUNNING THE SOFTWARE OR BY PLACING OR COPYING THE SOFTWARE ONTO YOUR COMPUTER HARD DRIVE YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THIS AGREEMENT S TERMS AND CONDITIONS YOU FURTHER AGREE THAT EXCEPT FOR WRITTEN SEPARATE AGREEMENTS BETWEEN EKTRON AND YOU THIS AGREEMENT IS A COMPLETE AND EXCLUSIVE STATEMENT OF THE RIGHTS AND LIABILITIES OF THE PARTIES Copyright 1999 2005 Ektron Inc All rights reserved LA10031 Revision 1 5 Trademarks All terms in this manual that are known to be trademarks have been capitalized Ektron Inc cannot attest to the accuracy of this information Use of a term in this manual does not affect the validity of any trademark The following trademarks might appear in Ektron manuals Active Directory ActiveX Authenticode BackOffice ClearType Developer Studio FrontPage IntelliSense JScript Microsoft MS DOS SharePoint Visual C Visual C Visual InterDev Visual J Visual J Visual Studio Visual Web Developer TM Win32 Win32s Windows Windows NT Windows Server TM Windows Server System TM Netscape Netscape Navigator Mozilla TM Firefox TM Table of Contents What s New in the 4 8 Release c cccsscssseeeseeeseeeeeeeeesees Introduction to Ektron CMS300 ccsscssssesesseeeseeeeeees 1 What i
118. TONE sirain a 449 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 ix Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 What s New in the 4 8 Release What s New in the 4 8 Release e Tasks can now have categories and types For more information see Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 220 e The Asset Management System is available as a separate add on module that requires a separate license For more information see Using the Asset Management System on page 236 e Anew advanced search screen provides more fields for finding information within the Workarea For more information see Search Content Folder on page 45 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 i What s New in the 4 8 Release Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 ii Introduction to Ektron CMS300 Introduction to Ektron CMS300 Using Ektron CMS300 to manage Web content is easy once you know the basics of setting up and maintaining your site This documentation explains how to maintain an Ektron CMS300 site from a user s point of view By reading this documentation you will gain an understanding of how Ektron CMS300 works This section introduces basic concepts that you should understand when beginning to work with Ektron CMS300 through the following subtopics e What is a Content Block on page 1 e Workflow in Ektron CMS300 on page 5 e Editing a Content Block on page 5 e The Life
119. Tag NOTE A different context sensitive menu is available when your cursor is within a table That menu is described in The Table Context Sensitive Menu on page 375 The following table lists the menu options and where to get more information on each Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 299 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Menus View all toolbar menus Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse on page 423 Cut Remove selected text and graphics Place that data into temporary memory If you later cut or copy more information into memory the information in memory is lost Copy Copy selected text and graphics into Copying from Other temporary memory Leave selected data Applications on page 303 where it is If you later cut or copy more information into memory the original information is lost Paste Insert the most recently cut or copied text and graphics at the current cursor location Paste Text Paste the contents of the clipboard as plain text That is all HTML tags including images are not pasted This button is helpful when you want to eliminate the HTML formatting of the text being copied Select All Select all information on your page After you select it you can cut it copy it etc Clean Source Remove unnecessary HTML tags Cleaning Source Code on page 421 Hyperlink Create a link to another Web page or a Using Hyperlinks o
120. This feature is available to help reduce disk space taken up by these files Before removing an image or file from your server you should review all content blocks with links to it and remove or update the link See Also Library Link Searching on page 129 To delete an item from the library follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item screen for the item you want to delete as described in Viewing Files on page 123 2 Click the Delete button E 3 The Delete Library Item screen is displayed If appropriate check the box next to Remove from the server see above 5 Click the Delete button i Adding a Library File to Content After a file is copied to the library users can add it to a content block To add a file to a content block follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 130 Library Folder 1 Invoke the editor by adding or editing a content block in Ektron CMS300 Edit Content Title Contact Ektron English U 5 3 Content Summary Search Data Schedule amp Apply Style Heading 4 Times New Roman 3 12 pt ad A J E 7 U aA SEABRA ZS Al0 Aeee s e 4 nbpoeomH g B Cl Re kal Click the Library button fi The following screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 131 Library Folder rosoft I 215 x J Ektron CMS300 Library For Application Administrator Micros Insert an imag
121. VERYIEW Welcome Executive Summary Ektron Partner Programs Ektron Technology Partners Benefits to Partners Ektron Products Partners in Learning Program 3 When you click the bookmark its full address appears in your browser s address bar This bookmark s address looks like this http www ektron com single cfm doc_id 35 Benefits2 4 Click the address bar The address is selected Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt to copy the address into the Windows clipboard 5 Go to eWebEditPro XML 6 Select the text or image from which you want to jump to the bookmark 7 Click the Hyperlink button E The hyperlink dialog box appears 8 Move the cursor to the Link field Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 417 Using Hyperlinks 9 Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt to paste the address you copied in Step 4 into the Link field 10 Click OK Editing a Hyperlink If you need to change a hyperlink s destination Web page or target frame follow these steps 1 Click the Hyperlink button The hyperlink dialog box appears Edit the Link or Target Frame field as needed Press OK Removing a Hyperlink If you want to remove the hyperlink from text or an image select the text or image and press the Remove Hyperlink button Bs Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink If you enter a URL or an email address into eWebEditPro XML it automatically becomes a hyperlink To prevent this enter an extra
122. Vertical Caption Alignment Not Set Respond to the fields in the dialog They are described below Heading If you want your table to have a horizontal header enter Rows the number of rows that it should occupy Beginning with the top all cells in the specified number of rows are designated as table headers Heading If you want your table to have a header enter the Columns number of columns that it should occupy Beginning with the left column all cells in the specified number of columns are designated as table headers Summary If desired enter the table summary Non visual browsers can use the summary to explain the contents of the table Caption If desired enter the table caption The caption appears centered below the table when viewed Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 427 Section 508 Compliance SSS Horizontal If desired enter the caption s horizontal alignment Caption Alignment 2 center e k eft e right Vertical If desired enter the caption s vertical alignment Caption Alignment e bottom e top After you complete the Table Properties dialog click OK to make the table comply with Section 508 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 428 Editing XML Web Pages Your Web developers have a lot of flexibility in how they implement eWebEditPro XML As a result this documentation cannot describe exactly how your system works This section e
123. View as HTML 3 Click the appropriate action from the menu For example to add a row Click Insert Row If you are working with nested tables and you add or remove a column then undo that action and redo it you must press the redo button once for each cell in the row or column specifying Table Width When you create a table you can set its width by specifying one of the following e percentage of the window the table s width varies as a user adjusts the browser size e fixed number of pixels the table s width stays the same as a user adjusts the browser size Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 378 Manipulating Your Table s Format You can also not set a width but instead let information you enter into the table s cells determine its width NOTE To set the width of a table column adjust the width of one of the cells within the column as described in Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 391 Usually this change affects all other cells in the column Specifying Table Width by Percentage Specify table width by percentage if you want the table to be resized as the user resizes the browser NOTE In order for the table to resize with the browser the Word Wrap attribute must be turned on in all of a table s cells For details see Word Wrap on page 406 For example if you specify that a table is 100 wide and your browser displays 14 inches across when it is maximized the table f
124. You add the new content block while adding a quicklink As a result the event will include a quicklink to the new content block To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 205 Working with Calendars 1 Access the Add Calendar Event screen as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 2 Enter event information such as title location date etc Click the Add Library H button The Quicklink Select screen appears Quicklink Select Please select a QuickLink by navigating the folders below Path D Human Resources D Marketing O products 5 Support io Syndication 5 Click the Add Content toolbar button 6 The Add New Content screen appears Edit Content Title Contact Ektron SsSE English U54 Content amp Apply Style Heading4 Times NewRoman 3 12 pt x A oa E ZUA SE BBBGA amp SS 8 oal eee NG A2 M a 2 s meecem Hola 8 lh Enter content into the new content block Click a workflow button from the toolbar at the top of the screen For more information about creating a content block see Adding a Content Block on page 37 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 206 Working with Calendars 9 The content is saved the window closes and the Add Calendar Event screen appears with the new content block added to the content tree 10 Click the title of the new co
125. a Bookmark e Changing the Destination Window Creating a Bookmark When creating a bookmark you must specify a e source the text or image that the user clicks to move to the bookmark Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 409 Using Bookmarks e bookmark the place to which the cursor jumps when the user clicks the source To continue with the above example a meeting date is the source and the meeting minutes are the bookmark To create a bookmark follow these steps 1 Select the bookmark text or image Click the Bookmark button a The Bookmark dialog box appears Enter the name of the bookmark The bookmark can include the following non alphabetic characters amp 4 Bookmark Bookmark name October 2000_minuted Delete Henane ino te Close 4 Click Add 5 The editor screen returns The bookmark does not appear on the page Select the source text or image Click the Hyperlink button jg The Hyperlink dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field and click the bookmark you created in Step 3 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 410 Using Bookmarks ite z select link ooo select link this page October 2000_minutes this page Top 9 If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Windo
126. a Menus Module Web page on your site Edit Web page on your site Editing a Content Block Menu Ty Item on page 176 Delete Web page on your Removing a Menu Item via its site Content Folder on page 186 To edit a menu via the Menus module follow these steps 1 Access the Menu Report screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 183 Click the menu you want to edit 3 The View Menu screen for that menu appears listing all items on the menu Editing a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via navigation link on a Web page follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 175 Working with Menus 1 Access the template where you inserted the link to display the menu 2 Click the Menu Navigation link title on the Web page 3 A DHTML menu is displayed along with all menu items on the menu Click Edit Menu The Edit Menu Item screen appears See Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder on page 174 Editing Types of Menu Items This section explains how to edit the following types of menu items e content block on your Web site e library asset e link to an external Web site e submenu Editing a Content Block Menu Item To edit a content block menu item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu you want to edit by referencing Viewing a Menu on page 179 2 The View Menu scre
127. a Table s Background Color To delete a table s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background 2p J Unassigned Background Color Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 385 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying a Background Image for a Table If you want a background image to appear in all table cells use the Background Image field of the Insert Table dialog box Custom Background Background Color EEr hf Unassigned Background Image Select Image Y Your Webmaster determines which images are available to you To insert a background image 1 2 3 Click the down arrow to the right of Select Image A list of background images appears Click the image of your choice Click OK Note that when you apply a background image to a table it applies to the entire table including the borders if the table is larger than the image the image repeats until it fills the table if the image is larger than the table the top left corner of the image aligns with the top left corner of the table The rest of the image fills as much of the table as possible you can also apply an image to individual cells see Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 397 make sure that the image does not obscure user s ability to read the table text Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision
128. a file Viewing Hyperlinks To view a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 123 The only difference is that you view a hyperlink instead of a file Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 133 Library Folder Editing Hyperlinks To edit a hyperlink follow the procedure described in Editing a File on page 125 The only difference is that you edit a hyperlink title instead of a file title You can also edit the URL Adding Hyperlinks to Your Content Images Once a hyperlink is added to the library users can add the hyperlink to their content blocks To add a hyperlink to a content block follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 130 The only difference is that you add a hyperlink instead of a file For a definition of the term images see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 115 Uploading Images You must copy images to the library before content creators can insert them into content blocks To copy an image to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 120 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file Viewing Images To view an image follow the procedure described in Viewing Files on page 123 The only difference is that you view an image instead of a file Editing Image Titles To edit an image s title follow the procedure described in Editing a Fil
129. a physical file the HTML may be edited However the changes are not saved to the Web Server The save option saves the version of the content you are viewing Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 89 Comparing Versions of a Content Block ioe tome e T Setup Opens setup dialog box to configure the settings Typically only an administrator would use this For more information see Setup on page 90 cam Displays additional information about the compare feature Exit Closes the window Ea Click the Setup button ca to open the setup dialog box Typically a system administrator would edit these settings Setup w Ektron eWebDiff f Compare visual aspect f Compare source code Whitespace Other C ignore All f Smart Detect C Detect All Ignore Case lgnore format a attributes You can change the setup options to better suit your needs The following table explains each option a naas Compare Options Compare visual Compares content as it would appear on a aspect Web page Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 90 Comparing Versions of a Content Block Ci se Compare source code Whitespace Options Ignore All Smart Detect Detect All Other Options Ignore Case Ignore Format Attributes Displays compared content as source HTML Blank whitespace characters are ignored One or more consecutive whitespace characters are treated as a si
130. a user Managing Tasks on page 213 Delete Open content block s View Content Viewing a Content Block page on page 33 Edit Check out content block for editing Editing a Content Block on page 40 Logout Log out of Ektron CMS300 view of Logging Out of the Web site Sample Site on page 11 Preview Preview content block before it is published Properties Open content block s View Content Viewing a Content Block page on page 33 View Display differences between a Comparing Versions of a Content previous and published version of Content Block on Difference content block page 87 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 4 Introduction to Ektron CMS300 Te View History Open View History area where you Viewing and Restoring can view previous versions of content Previous Content Blocks block on page 94 Workarea Opens Workarea from which you can The Workarea and perform all Ektron CMS300 tasks Smart Desktop on page 13 Workflow in Ektron CMS300 Organizations typically want a Web site that is updated frequently with the latest information They also want to decentralize the updating process so that non technical users from any department can make changes Further organizations want oversight over those changes to ensure the accuracy of the information that the content adheres to corporate guidelines etc Ektron CMS300 manages the lifecycle of a content block from creation through appr
131. al Version 4 8 Revision 7 394 Working with Table Cells 4 Click the Border Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box Border Color Scbeacee 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the cell border See Also Using the Color Box on page 398 Color Basic colors Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel Specifying a Cell s Background Color Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 384 explains how to apply a background color to a table You can also apply a background color to a cell To apply a background color to a cell follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 395 Working with Table Cells Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu gt ww V Click the Background Color field on the Cell Properties dialog box Custom Background Background Color M Unassigned 5 When you click that field a Windows Color selection box appears See Also Using the Color Box on page 398 Color Basic colors EE EHEN Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel 6 Click a color to apply to the background of the cell Deleting a Cell s Background Color To delete a cell s background color click the Unassigned box in the Custom Background area of the Cell Properties dialog
132. an also click a button then click lt Add This action places the button at the bottom of the list To remove a button from the toolbar drag it from the left side of the screen to the right You can also click a button then click Remove gt The Move Up and Move Down buttons let you to move any button up or down one slot within the list of buttons Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 294 Customizing Your Toolbar Rearranging the Items on a Menu 1 Click the button you want to move 2 Click Move Up and Move Down to move the button up or down one slot for each click Restoring Toolbars If you remove all toolbars from your menu and then want to restore the menus but do not have the Customize menu option follow these steps Place the cursor in the editor Right click the mouse A menu appears with a Redisplay toolbars option w u z Click this option to restore all menus Rearranging the Menus on a Toolbar To move a menu to a different toolbar location follow these steps 1 Place the cursor on the double vertical bars that indicate the _ ME E gi beginning of the menu Click the mouse Hold down the mouse button and drag the menu to the new location You can move the menu anywhere else on the toolbar Note that your Webmaster can define a menu so that it cannot reside on the same row with another menu If you move such a menu it will not remain on a row with another menu Instead
133. aneous This License Agreement the License granted hereunder and the Software may not be assigned or in any way transferred without the prior written consent of Ektron This Agreement and its performance and all claims arising from the relationship between the parties contemplated herein shall be governed by construed and enforced in accordance with the laws of the State of New Hampshire without regard to conflict of laws principles thereof The parties agree that any action brought in connection with this Agreement shall be maintained only in a court of competent subject matter jurisdiction located in the State of New Hampshire or in any court to which appeal therefrom may be taken The parties hereby consent to the exclusive personal jurisdiction of such courts in the State of New Hampshire for all such purposes The United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from governing this License If any provision of this License is to be held unenforceable such holding will not affect the validity of the other provisions hereof Failure of a party to enforce any provision of this Agreement shall not constitute or be construed as a waiver of such provision or of the right to enforce such provision If you fail to comply with any term of this License YOUR LICENSE IS AUTOMATICALLY TERMINATED This License represents the entire understanding between the parties with respect to its subject matter YOU ACKNOWLEDGE
134. anual Version 4 8 Revision 7 29 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Link Check Identifies content blocks or assets with a hyperlink to the current content block You would typically use this feature to remove the links before deleting a content block If you do not remove the links they are inoperative after the content block is deleted Overwrite Replaces an image or file with a newer version See Also Overwriting Files on page 126 Preview Previews item that was or will be added Publish Save and publish the content block Remove Removes items from folders and lists in the Workarea Reorder Changes the sequence of links in a collection See Also The screen is refreshed and the folder is deleted on page 56 Restore Restores previously published content block See Also Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks on page 94 Save Saves content that was modified Search Searches content and library folder screens See Also Searching the Library on page 119 Show Calendar Displays the calendar in the Workarea Submit Saves and submits content to next approver in the approval chain Update Changes are saved and content is updated i pee I Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 30 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Meme Pevernton View all calendar events for a selected day View Difference Opens the View Content Difference feature
135. ap end of a line Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 359 Editing Images Thumbnail Standard Toolbar Button er Description Create a thumbnail of the current image A dialog box prompts you to define the thumbnail Dialog Box i Thumbnail l Es Thumbnail Preview Thumbnail width 100 Pixels Thumbnail Height 100 Pixels Save Thumbnail As ic AY INET Wwweb Wallpaper thumbriall jpg To create a thumbnail follow these steps 1 Define the size of the thumbnail 100 x 100 pixels is the standard size but you can change it 2 Assign the thumbnail a name and folder location using the Save Thumbnail As field To change the default name you can either type the new file name into the field or click the button with the three dots circled above and navigate to a different folder 3 Click Create When you do the image appears in the Preview box so that you can see what it will look like Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 360 Editing Images Twain Acquire Standard Toolbar Button T Description Perform a single page scan from a previously selected source See Also Twain Source on page 361 Importing Scanned Images WeblmageFX lets you acquire images from a scanner or digital camera that supports the Twain standard You select the source using Twain Source and do a quick acquire from that source using Twain Acquire Limitations e You can only acqui
136. arch Data Schedule File Edit View Insert Format Tools Slide Show Help efetey tg eles j Daeb Say el 46m 1 Ee Bob s powerpoint project ei io tif We Common Tasks Bob s powerpoint project You can insert summary search data schedule comment and task information for the Office document From the View Content screen you can use standard toolbar buttons to perform actions such as view history submit for publishing and delete For more information see Working with Office Documents on page 239 Managed Files Ektron CMS300 can track and control any non Office type of file that runs on your computer for example PDF gif and zip When editing these file types the host application appears in a separate window The Ektron CMS300 View Content screen appears in the background Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 238 Using the Asset Management System Edit Content F Fj wl i Wi mal Ee a or E EOR A A Title Machine server license English 0 5 Content Summary Search Data Schedule S machine server license txt Notepad o _ O File Edit Format Help The server license is intended for use on_a single server with unlimited URLs web sites All sites must run from a single webserver system HHH AA AA AAA A A A A A SERYER LICENSE TWSTRUCTIONS HHH HAHA AYA AAA AA AOA A AAA AA A A AA AA A A 1 Run the cmMs400severLicense exe
137. are not authorized your edits are not saved when you leave the eWebEditPro XML screen lf you are authorized to customize your toolbar there are six ways to do so You can e remove or add available menus e remove or add toolbar buttons e rearrange menus on a toolbar e create anew menu e move a menu off the toolbar e rearrange the buttons on a menu Each procedure is explained below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 291 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing Or Adding Menus To remove or add a menu follow these steps Place the cursor on the toolbar Right click the mouse A dropdown list appears It displays all menus available to you and the Customize option Z Edit View As Paragraph Format e Format e Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Text Direction Customize NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar Menus that are checked appear on your toolbar In the above example the Special Characters View As Format and Paragraph Format menus appear The Table Position Objects and Text Directions menus which are not checked are available but do not currently appear on the toolbar 4 To addamenu to your toolbar that appears on the list but is not currently checked place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse A check mark appears and the menu appears on the toolbar To remove a menu from y
138. ask Type Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 226 Managing Tasks Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen Assigned to User All open tasks assigned to a user you Select any user and view select all tasks assigned to that user To do so select new user from Assign to User drop down list and click Get Tasks Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Not Started All whose state is Not Started Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Active All whose state is Active Change to the following states Awaiting Data On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Awaiting Data All whose state is Awaiting Data Change to the following states Active On Hold Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 227 Managing Tasks Action you can perform Displays these tasks from view screen On Hold All whose state is On Hold All whose state is Pending All whose state is Reopened Completed All whose state is Completed Sorting Tasks By Task Type Change to the following states Active Awaiting Data Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Click on the task to view it Sort
139. at some Word formatting may not be transferred back to eWebEditPro XML Press Yes if you still want to edit in Word Edit in Word Ea C Tou are about to edit your document in MS Word Que to the limitations of HTML there may be a loss of formatting wT when returning the document to the editor Do you wish to proceed 4 Microsoft Word opens Any content that was in eWebEditPro XML when you pressed the Word button is copied to Word Edit content as desired Press File gt Close 7 Another warning like the one in Step 3 may appear Press Yes to copy the edited content back to eWebEditPro XML 8 When done return to eWebEditPro XML and press the Word toolbar button again Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 313 Editing in Microsoft Word 9 If you change your mind and decide to restore the content to the way it was before you edited it in Word press the undo button If you want to restore the Word changes after pressing Undo press the redo button See Also Uploading an Image in a Microsoft Word Document If you insert an image into the Word content and then paste that content or save it the following dialog box appears The box lists all images in the content and asks if you want to copy them from your computer to your organization s Web server Files Wanting for Upload Files for Upload Upload Mow Upload Later Woodgrove Bank About Estimated Upload Time o0 00 1 2
140. ate on page 354 of degrees Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 336 Editing Images Annotation Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see pointer selection Click an annotation to select it Pointer Selection on page 351 choose color Sets the color for an annotation Choose Color on before you insert it page 339 choose font Sets the color of text before you Choose Font on insert it page 340 freehand Draws a line in any shape that you Freehand on want page 347 Draws a straight line Line on page 348 polygon Draws a polygon a closed figure Polygon on page 352 surrounded by straight lines rectangle Draws a rectangle Rectangle on page 353 Blur Standard Toolbar Button amp Description Blurs or softens an image You can select a level of blur from O through 4 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 337 Editing Images If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Dialog Box mes Brightness Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases or decreases an image s brightness You can select a brightness level from 32 brightest through 32 darkest If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area NOTE You cannot adjust brightness if the image s bit depth is 8 or fewer See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 363
141. b site Setting the Go Live Date on Existing Content When you set a go live date for changes made to an existing content block and it completes the approval chain the content has a grey border within Ektron CMS300 until the date specified Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 59 Scheduling Content to Begin and End When you view the content block on the Web site you see the previously published version When the go live date occurs the new content replaces the previously published version and the content block s status changes to Active setting an End Date on a Content Block To set an end date for a content block follow these steps 1 Access the editor by adding a new content block or editing an existing one lf adding a new content block enter a title and content Click the calendar button next to the End Date field ok L L M d E W a e F T End Date TPA i o aAa E A calendar pops up Frac h Select the date and time you want the content to be removed from the Web site 6 Click the Submit button 7 The date and time appear in the End Date field End Date 14 Feb 2003 11 59 59 PM Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 60 Scheduling Content to Begin and End NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not be removed at the intended time What Happens
142. be restricted by your system administrator in the configuration setup screen When done click the Save button 1 The View Content page reappears The status of the content block changes to checked out to you NOTE When you enter or edit an existing content block s summary its status changes to checked out After you create the summary click the Check In button to check the content block in From that point you need to submit or publish it Editing a Summary NOTE You can only edit the summary of content blocks that are published checked in or checked out by you To edit the a content block s summary follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content block whose summary you want to edit as described in Viewing a Content Block on page 33 2 Click the Summary tab Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 66 Adding a Content Block Summary 3 The Edit Summary window opens Edit Content Title Contact Ektron English U S 4 Content Summary Search Data Schedule Lae Apple Style gt Normal Verdana 2 10 pt x A ae HB i 2 ape E B Po Describes how to kontact Ektron Click the Edit button The summary opens within the editor Click the Save button H The summary is saved and the View Content page is displayed with a status of checked out 4 5 Make the necessary changes 6 7 NOTE When you edit an existing content block s summary it
143. block s Schedule screen Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 61 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Action on End Date Archive and remove from site expire Archive and remain on site Add to the CMS Refresh Report Each option is explained below Archive Options Can site visitors view Can users view and edit content upon expiration content within Ektron CMS300 upon expiration Archive and remove from site Yes within its folder by clicking expire Archive and remain on Site Yes The content will not appear on a page that uses the Listsummary function but will appear wherever the ArchiveListSummary function is used Add to CMS Refresh Report Yes in its content folder and on the Refresh Report See Also Refresh Reminder Report on page 111 Restoring Content from Archived to Active State To restore a content block from archived state to active follow these steps Navigate to its folder 2 If necessary click the Archive button to view it See Archive Options on page 62 Click the Edit button 7 Click the Schedule tab Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 62 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 5 Remove the End Date or change it to a future date 6 Submit the content for publishing When the content block is published it will no longer be archived Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 63 Adding a Content Block Summary Add
144. can enter formatting information about the HTML code View Preferences Ea 10 Cancel Font Size Font Hame Cainer These settings will be used whenever you view as HTML The settings are ignored when you view the page in WYSIWYG mode and when the user views the page 3 To return to normal view click the View as WYSIWYG button E1 or right click the mouse and click View WYSIWYG Editing a Section of a Page If you want to edit only a section of the HTML on your Web page follow these steps 1 Select the portion of your Web page that you want to edit 2 Right click the mouse 3 Click Edit Source from the menu The HTML code appears 4 Edit the HTML code as desired 5 Click OK Inserting Source If you want to insert HTML source code into your Web page follow these steps 1 Place the cursor at the spot on the page where you want to insert the HTML Right click the mouse 3 Click Insert Source from the menu The Insert Source dialog box appears Paste or type your HTML code 5 Click OK Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 420 Working with HTML Cleaning Source Code eWebEditPro XML lets you clean the HTML source code for your Web page You would typically use this feature after entering HTML text or pasting HTML code into eWebEditPro XML from another application The Clean Source option removes unnecessary HTML tags ensures that all tags begin and end properl
145. cesseseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 367 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus csscceeseeceeseeeeeeeeeeees 369 The Insert Table Menu cccccseccsseecesecnseeeeseceseseneeeeeeseees 369 The Table Properties Dialog BOX cccssscseeseeseeseeseseeeeenenees 371 The Cell Properties Dialog BOX ccsssscesesseessenseeeseneeenenseens 373 The Table Context Sensitive Menu cccscssseessseseeseneeees 375 Manipulating Your Table s Format cccssccsseseseeeeeeeeeeeees 376 Choosing the Number of Rows and Column 05 376 Specifying Table Width c c ccccsssseessssseceesseeeeeseeeeeneeseesees 378 Specifying Table Width by Percentage ccccsssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 379 Specifying Table Width by Pixels cccssssscceceesseeeeesssesseeeeeees 381 Specifying Horizontal Alignment cccsssseeesseeseeeeeennees 382 Table BACK OIOUINGS weassstidsscnsssnsaraussieuassennsnavedssessinsinensranreswasceweses 384 Specifying a Table s Background Color ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 384 Specifying a Background Image for a Table cccccesseeeeeeeees 386 Setting Table BOSS vississuscsacivenstacdbiseshenessisassesusnssavanecianiandaias 387 Assigning Border CoOlOr ccccccccsseseeceeeceeeeeeeesueeeeeeeseeenseeeeeeaeaees 387 Assigning Border Size x ocastyeesrsciiassveets tiaras semincateneetemenenes 389 Working with Table Cells cccccsss
146. ck change it on page 40 Edit Summary Edit the brief summary used to Adding a Content Block describe the content Summary on page 64 Edit Search Change the content block s Adding or Editing Search Data search data Data on page 68 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 443 Appendix A Content Statuses Description For more information see Submit a request to delete the Deleting a Content Block content If you are the last or on page 44 only approver the content is immediately deleted See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 79 Go to previous window Checked In Content lf a content block has a green border it could mean that the content block is checked in A checked in content block is one to which changes were made after which it was checked in instead of being submitted or published When a content block is checked in it is accessible to all users who have permissions to edit it They can check it out and change it Keep in mind that the content seen on the template is not the same as the content in the editor view Content ktr Title About Us Checked In by Application Administrator Ektron is a recognized international leader in Web content authoring and publishing Ektron s easy to use affordable a full featured content management systems address the c organizational need of simplifying dynamic Web content mananement With Ereteon s fheowece
147. ck Table from the menu 4 Click Cell Properties from the menu 5 The Cell Properties dialog box appears In the Rows Spanned or Columns Spanned field enter the number of rows or columns that you want this cell to span Span Rowe Spanned Columns Spanned 6 Click OK Effect of Spanning a Cell When you set a cell to span rows or columns the editor does not remove the cells that are in the way Instead it moves those cells across or down to the next available position For example the following table has two rows and two columns Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 400 Working with Table Cells If you set cell A to span two rows note that cell C moves across to make room for cell A This action pushes cell D to the next column Aligning Text Within a Cell Within a cell you can specify how your text aligns horizontally and vertically Setting Horizontal Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the horizontal alignment of a cell You have set the alignment to left center or right or e left e center e right e justify the text is justified down both left and right edges Many books use this alignment style This alignment is not supported by all browsers Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 401 Working with Table Cells This example illustrates these choices text right justified center justified ext left justified This text ig both ju
148. ck the Save button tl Editing a Menu via Menus Module To edit a menu via the Menus Module follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 183 2 Click the Edit button L Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 172 Working with Menus 3 The Edit Menu screen is displayed 4 As necessary update the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 5 Click the Save button 1 Editing a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page To edit a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Navigate to the Web page that contains the link to display the menu Click the menu link 3 The menu appears Click the Edit option The View Menu screen for the menu appears Click the Edit button CY The Edit Menu screen is displayed ae eS SS As necessary update the fields by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 9 Click the Save button 1 Editing a Menu Item You can edit a menu item via e its content folder e menus module Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 173 Working with Menus e navigation link on a Web page Editing a Menu Item via its Content Folder To edit a menu item from its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder
149. content border color m delete folder 29 view published 31 eaning 442 do not apply XSLT 29 view staged 31 edit 29 WYSIWYG view as 280 Z insert library item 29 inkeheck s0 X zoom in WeblmageFX command 363 avente s zoom out WeblmageFX command 363 preview 30 XML attribute publish 30 inserting 434 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 vii
150. cribed in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 139 2 Access the View Collection Screen for a collection as described in Viewing a Collection on page 142 3 If you are using Ektron CMS300 s multi language support select the language of the collection Click the Add button qq The Add Items to Collection screen appears 6 If your collection includes sub folders and you want to add the content block to one of them navigate to that sub folder Otherwise proceed to the next step Click the Add Content button The Add Content screen appears If you are using Ektron CMS300 s multi language support the content block s language appears next to the title The language is derived from the collection s language and cannot be changed Edit Content Title Contact Ektron English U S Content amp Apply Style Heading 4 Times New Roman 3 12 pt bi A oy E 7 U 2 B E S 2B BBRAA SOMO Fw aael E s 2 s mecem m ola 8 WES Contact Ektron Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 149 Working with Collections 9 Create the content block NOTE Refer to Adding a Content Block on page 37 for additional information for creating new content blocks 10 Click a workflow option in the Add Content screen 11 The Add Content screen closes and the new content block link appears in the list of links available to the collection 12
151. cting Text You select text before performing an action on it such as copying it e To select all information on a page press Ctrl A e To select a portion of the information on a page you have two choices Hold down the left mouse button and drag the cursor across the data you want to select Hold down the Shift key and the right arrow key El until the desired data is selected Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 276 Toolbar Buttons e To select a single word place the cursor on the word and double click the mouse Selected text has different background and foreground colors as illustrated below Horizontal Sets the horizontal position of the entire Alignment able Border olor Sets the color of the table borders Hnlescs sa Palant ointaris checker Applying Formatting Attributes to Text Several buttons apply formatting attributes to text such as bold and italics There are two ways to apply these attributes e Enter the text Then select the text and press the toolbar button The button is now in a pressed in condition and the text has the formatting attribute e Press the toolbar button Then begin typing the text As you type the formatting is applied To stop applying the formatting press the button again This action changes the button to a pressed out condition and terminates the formatting Table of Tooloar Buttons and Drop Down Lists The following table
152. cycle of a Content Block on page 6 What is a Content Block Any Web site consists of several pages Each page is made up of one or more blocks of content For example the home page of the sample Web site that is installed with Ektron CMS300 is below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 1 Introduction to Ektron CMS300 RG international Home Products Support Mews Careers Search Calendar Login Contact EF Lots of new features in Ektron CMS300 NEW FEATURE Trinity In Line Pipe NEW PRODUCT Introducing the RC Redstar Trinitys new pipe and manifold are for rear exhaust RC International is proud to introduce the RC Redstar engines and are now used in both the Sportster and This new addition to the RC International fleet brings the cheetah Both the manifold and pipe are made from new options to our customers With laser cut balsa high quality aluminum This new pipe is more durable wings and a wing span of 71 this is one plane that and will withstand a bad crash has to be seen Copyright 2003 Ektron Inc Sample Site After you sign in notice that as you move the cursor colored borders appears around one or more areas of the page Each surrounded area is a content block that can be edited independently The border disappears when you move the cursor out of the area Your system administrator controls the design of each page and determines where the content blocks appear NOTE The colored borde
153. d below NOTE You can also use this dialog to delete text that appears repeatedly To do so follow the directions in Finding and Replacing Text on page 304 and enter nothing in the Replace With field Finding Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find in the content 2 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 305 3 Click Find Next to find the next occurrence of the find text Finding and Replacing Text 1 Inthe Find What field type the text that you want to find 2 Inthe Replace With field type the text to replace the find text Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 304 Finding and Replacing Text 3 Set dialog box options see Additional Options on the Dialog Box on page 305 4 lf you want to replace all occurrences of the find text with the replace text click Replace All NoTE You can undo replacements one at a time using the Undo button i replace only the highlighted term with the replace text click Replace find the next occurrence of the find text and optionally replace it with the replace text click Find Next change the highlighted term using the editor exit the Find and Replace dialog move to the term and edit as needed To restart the search press the Find Next button 3 5 Continue to find and optionally replace or edit until you reach the
154. d remove calendar events is determined by your permissions for that folder e The following illustrates the workflow of calendar tasks Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 192 Working with Calendars View all calendars lew information for one calendar lew calendar jump to Add event View events linked web page ah EN Edit event Apply Add new content block Ej Accessing the View Calendar Screen The View Calendar screen collects general information about a calendar and provides toolbar buttons that let you perform calendar related activities To access the View Calendar screen follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 193 Working with Calendars 1 Access the Modules folder from the lower left corner of the Workarea 2 Click the Calendars folder mG Modules aH Collections HO Calendars 5 MemberShips 3 The Calendar Modules screen appears It lists all calendars in Ektron CMS300 Calendar modules Title ID Description Fath Re International listing of events for RC International news y Calendar events NOTE Only system administrators can create a new calendar 4 Click a calendar 5 The View Calendar screen appears showing information about the calendar Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 194 Working with Calendars View Calendar RC International Calendar Title Re International Calendar ID 1
155. d to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content blocks you want to add You can only add content blocks in the selected language Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist Navigate to the folder in which you will create the collection Click the View Collections button Za The View Collections screen is displayed Click the Add button cH and enter basic information about the collection This screen is described in Creating a Collection on page 144 The View Collections in Folder screen appears Click the collection you just created From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 154 Working with Collections 6 Using the Add button ca select the content blocks to add to the collection Navigate through the folders to the content block you want to add You can only add content blocks in the selected language Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Features A menu a collection and the Listsummary function are similar in that they let you add a list of links to a Web page The following table compares these features to help you understand which one would best accommodate your needs for a particular page NOTE To implement these features the assistance of a developer is required Display title of a content blocks in a folder and possibly subfolders Display title
156. ded content A CMS Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer SE Welcome to RC internM ational RG vs Yee is dedicated to the RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live EC racing In three short years ET ational has become one of the leading manufactures of EC racing and flying vehicles Our dedication to the sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RO community We will continue striving to improve our affordable products and hope you will become an RC ational member Within the View Content Difference feature you can perform several tasks as well as view different versions of the content separately or compared When Can Compare Content The View Content Difference feature is only available when you are viewing an historical version of a content block a staged version of the content is available See Also Staged Content on page 449 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 87 Comparing Versions of a Content Block The following table explains when you can use the feature and which versions are compared Content Block Compares current published Status version with Published Historical version stored in the content history area Checked In Most recently checked in version Submitted Submitted version Pending Start Date Scheduled version pending start date Checked Out Not available lf a content block can be compared with another version the Vi
157. der on page 31 e Viewing a Content Block on page 33 e Adding a Content Block on page 37 e Editing a Content Block on page 40 e Deleting a Content Block on page 44 e Search Content Folder on page 45 e Adding Sub Folders on page 54 e Deleting Folders on page 55 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 27 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Workarea Toolbar Buttons The top of many Workarea screens feature a toolbar that contains buttons for performing actions This section explains the buttons functions Button Add Calendar Event Accesses the add calendar event screen in the Workarea Add Content Block In a content folder opens the editor and allows you to create a new content block See Also Adding a Content Block on page 37 Add Content Folder In a content folder allows you to create a sub folder to further organize your content blocks See Also Adding Sub Folders on page 54 Add Library Item In the library folder allows you to upload an image or file or add a hyperlink or quicklink to use in content See Also Library Folder on page 115 Add Task Assign task to a user See Also Managing Tasks on page 213 Approvals View approval chain for folder or content block See Also Approving Declining Content Blocks on page 6 Approve content that awaits your approval Approve All In the approvals folder approves all content awaiting your ap
158. der Color field on the Insert Table dialog box Border Color Border Size When you click that field a color selection box appears Click the color that you want to apply to the table s border Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 388 Manipulating Your Table s Format 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Color HE Basic colors mr MT ey a eT eee ADETE E Oe f A Ue o BREE Eee Eee ST Custom colors if ef ee ee ite fe ee Define Custom Colors gt gt OF Cancel A large question mark appears next to your cursor Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Assigning Border Size You can also adjust the size of a table border Size is measured in pixels one pixel 15 pixel table border table border Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 389 Manipulating Your Table s Format To assign a border size to your table enter a number of pixels into the Border Size field on the Insert Table dialog box Border Size z If you set a table s border size to zero 0 but wish to view the table s boundary lines while you are editing it select the table and click the border button Ed Boundary lines will appear while you are editing but disappear when a user views the page Ekt
159. der icon t next to them view Menu My test Views In eee English US a es select language i UO contact Ektron B L Home Page Content B T py submenu OF my submenu E B m L support Page B www ektron com EB T Related Web Sites B B T Another submenu amp B m a 3rd submenu D BT L RedStar Airplane smaller version B T dh Ylore Info 4 Click the Add Item icon amp next to the submenu The Add Menu screen opens displaying items you can add 6 Refer to the table below for selecting a menu item and follow the steps to add it Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Content block Adding a Content Block as a Menu Item on page 167 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 170 Working with Menus Assign this type of content to For details see the menu Any library asset images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu Item on page 168 External hyperlink Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item on page 169 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 169 Adding a New Content Block to a Menu via Navigation Link on a Web Page NOTE You can only use this feature after your Web developer has modified a page template to display the menu This procedure is described in the Ektron CMS300 Developer Manual section Custom ASP Functions gt Menus To add a ne
160. ding or Editing Search Data on page 68 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 57 13 If desired you can edit the document s properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 243 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 242 Using the Asset Management System 14 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would a content block See Also Adding a Content Block on page 37 and Save Check in and Publish on page 243 Editing a Document s Properties If the host application such as Microsoft Word has a Properties screen you can access it by clicking File gt Properties or the Properties option on the host applications Document Management menu NOTE Ektron CMS300 installs the Document Management menu on the Office application Documenti Properties E 2 XI General Summary Statistics Contents uskom Title Expense Report January 2005 Subject Travel expenses 00 Author JonWu Manager Jim Bearer Company Ekron Category Expenses sss Keywords Jewel Comments Does not include trip to corporate headquarters in Cincinnati on 1 15 05 Hyperlink Tr base Template Normal dot m Save preview picture Save Check in and Publish When you finish editing a document you have four options for what to do next They are explained in the following table Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 243 Using the Asset
161. diting Collection Information on page 152 Delete Delete a collection Deleting a Collection on page 152 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 143 m Working with Collections Button Name Description More Information a j Return to previous screen Creating a Collection NOTE Creating a collection involves two steps e Adding a Collection on page 144 e Assigning Content Blocks to the Collection on page 147 The following sections explain each step This section explains creating a collection in a site that does not support multiple languages If you want to create collections in several languages see the Ektron CMS300 Administrator manual section Special Features gt Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content gt Working with Collections in a Multi Language System Adding a Collection NOTE To add a new collection follow these steps 1 Navigate to the folder in which you want to create the collection 2 lf you are using Ektron CMS300 s multi language support features select the language See Also Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 153 3 Click the Collections button 3 If you access the collection via the Collections folder you cannot choose the collection s folder It is automatically placed in the Content folder Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 144 Working with Collec
162. document server To do so click the Work Offline button al If you do the asset remains in a checked out state and only you or a system administrator can check it in to work on it again When you check it in the file on your local computer is loaded into the Workarea As a result you can edit the asset on your local computer anywhere without a network connection When you are ready to return it to the document server check it in save it or submit it for publishing You must check the asset in on the same computer on which you checked it out NOTE A system administrator can check in any checked out asset If he does the most recently published asset gets checked in Editing an Office Document After an Office document is stored in the AMS follow these steps to edit It 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the document s folder 3 From the View Contents of Folder screen click the document 4 The View Content screen for the document appears If the document is checked in it appears on the Content tab in the Workarea but you cannot edit NOTE Your administrator controls the initial view you see when you edit a dcoument The following table shows the two different ways you can preview a document Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 250 Using the Asset Management System Preview Turned on View Content Test Asset Management ta Tle amp Eh ie jh ee co
163. document under a different language click the dropdown list and select the language Mar 2005 03 29 Mar 2005 01 14 6 Click the Add Content button 7 The Insert New Document Object screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 241 Using the Asset Management System Insert New Document Object eo BHA sa f Create New Microsoft Excel Chart Cancel w Gaei Microsoft Excel Worksheet E Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Microsoft Word Document Result Inserts a new Image Document object into pour k document NOTE The list of object types is determined by the applications installed on your computer For example an MS Project file type only displays if MS Project is installed 8 Ifthe document does not yet exist check the Create New button Then select the type of document you want to create and press OK If the document already exists see Importing One Office Document into the AMS on page 245 9 The application assigned to the document type appears within Ektron CMS300 10 Enter a Title and add content to the document 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable See Also Add to Quicklinks Table on page 39 and Content Searchable on page 39 12 If desired add a summary search data a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Block Summary on page 64 e Ad
164. e Description 1n Filename Browse Edit Library Item in Folder Content ry A lel amp Search Data Mot Included Included All gt Keyword All lt lt lt Category No Selection Selection Featured sell by date Fes Required fields bd NOTE The Search Data section of the screen is designed by your system administrator 4 Use the following table to help you insert a library item into the content Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 132 Library Folder Insert an Image top Screen Section Browse to and insert any file on your PC or network Edit Library Item in Folder bottom Screen Section View Properties Display folder properties See Library Folder Properties on page 117 Search the Ektron CMS300 library See Searching the Library on page 119 Insert Image Insert an image from the content block s corresponding Library images folder Extended library Insert a file from the library or anywhere on your PC or network Hyperlinks For a definition of the term hyperlinks see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 115 Adding Hyperlinks You must copy hyperlinks to the library before content creators can insert them into content blocks To copy a hyperlink to the library follow the procedure described in Copying Files to the Library on page 120 The only difference is that you insert a hyperlink instead of
165. e Once the image is in WeblmageFX you can use the buttons and menu options to edit it The rest of this chapter describes those buttons and menu options Saving the Image When you finish editing the image you can insert it into the content by pressing the Exit button ls Alternatively you can save the image to a local or network folder using the Save button lil When you insert the image into the content WebImageFX checks the file extension If the image is a gif file it is saved as a png file in your temporary directory For example test gif is saved as C Documents and Settings your user name Local Settings Temp test png Any other file type is saved in your temporary directory without changing the file extension unless you use the Save As option For example you save test jpg as test png Assigning a Name to a New Image If you create an image in WeblmageFX and then exit WeblImageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML the system assigns the image a random name such as WIF50A jpg If you want to assign a different name and or folder to the image use the Save as command See Also Save As on page 356 Toolbar Buttons and Menu Commands The following tables list each toolbar button and menu command They are followed by a more detailed description of each function Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 333 Editing Images File Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button inf
166. e on page 125 The only difference is that you edit an image s title instead of a file title Overwriting Images When an image in the library becomes out of date or if the wrong version of an image was copied you may overwrite that image with Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 134 Library Folder a new or correct version Overwriting images minimizes disk space and the number of copied library images NOTE Overwriting images is an advanced permission that you may or may not have To overwrite an image follow the procedure described in Overwriting Files on page 126 The only difference is that you overwrite an image instead of a file NOTE You can only overwrite an image with another image of the same extension that is gif gt gif not jpg gt gif Adding Images to Your Content Once an image is added to the library users can add it to a content block To add an image to a content block follow the procedure described in Adding a Library File to Content on page 130 The only difference is that you add an image instead of a file The image is placed into the picture properties dialog box where you can change it before inserting it For information about the picture properties dialog box see Using the First Picture Properties Dialog Box on page 317 Quicklinks and Forms For a definition of the terms quicklinks and forms see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 115 Adding a
167. e pe e L Delete Approve the deletion request Note If you are the last user in the approval chain the content is deleted when you click this Decline Refuse the deletion request This sends the content block back into a checked in status Back Go to previous window e m een Pending Start Date Content Content that is pending a Go Live date has been approved but its scheduled go live date and time have not occurred yet You cannot perform any action on a content block with a pending start date Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 448 Appendix A Content Statuses Staged Content A staged version of a content block is one that is not published It can be a content block that is checked in or one that is approved with a pending a start date Staging lets you make changes to a content block while keeping it from the Web site until you are ready to publish it Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 449 Index 508 compliance 422 A about eWebEditPro box 281 absolute positioning of objects 283 add button calendar event 28 library items 28 task 28 workarea toolbar 28 content block button 28 folder button 28 screen options 39 responding to fields 38 content block 37 address email user editing 264 alignment cell 401 image 325 table 382 text 281 approval chain example 79 approvals toolbar button 28 approve all toolbar button 28 button floating toolbar 4 worka
168. e Overwrite File screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 127 Library Folder Overwrite Library tem in Folder Contenti files Title Filename 400 documentation fomss00sample uploadedFiles 400 doc Browse Please select a replacement file Search Data Not Included Included All gt Keyword All lt lt lt Category No Selection Selection Featured Iv sell by date TE Required fields Click the Browse button A window opens that lets you locate the new file Click the file then click the Open button a oY R You return to the overwrite file screen with the path to the new file in the text field Filename CMS300Sample uploadedFiles Punctuation Introducing Lis C Tech Fubs deptConventions Terminoloc Browse Please select a replacement file 8 To preview the file before you copy it click the Preview button C The file is previewed in a separate window Click the X button in the top right corner of the screen to close it and return to the Workarea Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 128 Library Folder 9 As needed update the search data on the lower section of the screen Your system administrator defines the search data in the Search Data Definitions screen 10 To overwrite the current version of the file with this version click the Update button ff 11 The following message appears Microso
169. e jumps within a file see Using Bookmarks on page 409 For example if your Web page includes a jump to the Ektron Web site you would enter the text to indicate the jump for example Ektron Web Site then create a hyperlink to www ektron com When users see Ektron Web Site in a different color they can click the text to jump to the site Although most jumps go to the top of another Web page you can also jump to a bookmark within a Web page This section explains e Creating a Hyperlink e Testing a Hyperlink e Creating a Hyperlink to a Location within a Web Page e Editing a Hyperlink e Removing a Hyperlink e Preventing a URL from Becoming a Hyperlink Creating a Hyperlink When creating a hyperlink you must specify a e source the text or image the user clicks to move to the destination e destination the Web page to which the display moves when the user clicks the source Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 413 Using Hyperlinks To continue with the above example Ektron Web Site is the source and the Web page available at www extron com is the destination To create a hyperlink click the Hyperlink button B When you do the Hyperlink dialog box appears From there you can select from a list of Web pages also known as Quicklinks Or if the page you are jumping to is not on the list enter the url address of the destination Web page Each choice is described below Using a Quickli
170. e s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Attributes Ed Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size E I Highlight Cancel Open Standard Toolbar Button Description Select an image for editing The image can be on your computer or a local area network Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 349 Editing Images Dialog Box Ei Ed Load Image Look in lt a eWeblmaget dit EE History ae a j A oa Deskto m Files of type JPEG Files jog jpeg i Cancel Open as read only ve To change the type of file that appears in the window click the down arrow circled above to the right of the Files of type field Your system administrator determines which types of files you can edit Oval Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws an oval To use this command click the oval command drag the line and release the mouse To change the oval s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 350 Editing Images Dialog Box Attributes Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size E I Highlight Cancel Paste as New Image Standard Toolbar Button Description After you copy or cut an image or an a
171. e the document NOTE To learn about working with folders see Working with Folders and Content Blocks on page 26 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view the asset types you can add Je D e amp Ei See ee a raai e 7 Managed Files All Types HTML Content Office Documents 1033 28 4 Select Office Documents 5 Click the Add Content button _ Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 245 NOTE NOTE Insert New Document Object Using the Asset Management System 6 The Insert New Document Object screen appears Sti Create New Microsoft Excel Chart Cancel w Geaen Microsoft Excel Worksheet lt Microsoft PowerPoint Presentation Microsoft Word Document Result Inserts a new Image Document object into pour k document The list of object types is determined by the applications installed on your computer For example an MS Project file type only displays if MS Project is installed 7 Check the Create From File button E e e APAS ISSNA IN amne Chek Ee Browse 8 Click the Browse button and browse to the file you want to import into AMS Click OK 9 The document appears within the host application 10 Enter a Title and add content to the document If you want to retain the original document name insert the full filename into the Title field For example you could enter mydocument doc Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version
172. eading the Web pages moves the cursor over the image Deleting a Picture If you want to delete a picture follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 329 Inserting Images 1 Move the cursor over the picture 2 Click the mouse to select the picture 3 Click the Cut button a Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 330 Editing Images WeblImageFX lets you select an image from the content edit that image and then insert the updated image into the content Editing consists of several functions available on the toolbar such as e brightening e rotating e changing the color depth e inserting text This section explains WebImageFX Important WeblmageFX is an external add on product available from Ektron Using WeblmageFX Choosing the Image If you double click an image it appears within WebImageFX You can also right click the mouse and choose Image Editor from the menu that appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 331 Editing Images WebImageFX looks similar to eWebEditPro XML but has different menu and toolbar buttons Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 332 Editing Images If the Image Edit button A appears on your toolbar you can click it to open WebImageFX If no image is selected when you press the button or click the menu command a blank editor appears and you can use the File gt Open command to choose an imag
173. ear between the columns and rows To insert a table within a table follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell into which you want to insert a table 2 Click the Insert Table button E 3 Click Insert Table from the menu Insert Table Inzert Aor Insert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells Menge ells Split Cell T able Properties Cell Properties 4 The Insert Table dialog box appears 5 Edit the fields in the dialog box as needed Then click OK Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 368 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus This section explains the menu options and dialog boxes you use to manipulate tables and cells In most cases you are referred to another section that describes the feature in more detail This section explains e The Insert Table Menu e The Table Properties Dialog Box e The Cell Properties Dialog Box e The Table Context Sensitive Menu The Insert Table Menu You access the Insert Table menu by clicking on the Insert Table button E while the cursor is inside a table NOTE Before you click the button make sure the table is not selected that is the table is not surrounded by small boxes When you do the following menu appears E Insert Table Insert Aow Inert Column Insert Cell Delete Rows Delete Columns Delete Cells sa Merge elle Split Cell a Table Properties sta Cell Properties Ektron CMS3
174. earance on this report indicates that they are due for a content review See Also Setting Archive Options on page 61 Each item on the report contains the following information Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 111 Content Workflow Reports Title of content block ID number assigned to content block by Ektron CMS300 Last Editor Last user to edit the content block Email Click this icon to send instant email to the Last Editor See Also Ektron CMS300 Administrator manual chapter email Features Date Date and time the content block was last updated Modified Folder location of content block in Ektron CMS300 Web site Expired Content Report The Expired Content report displays all content blocks whose end date has passed As such they are no longer visible on the Web site Each item on the list contains the following information Title of content block ID number assigned to content block by Ektron CMS300 Last Editor Last user to edit the content block End Date Date and time the content block expired Folder location of content block in Ektron CMS300 Web site Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 112 Content Workflow Reports Editing Expired Content You may edit any content block on the Expired Content report To do so follow these steps Click the content block you want to view The View Content page is displayed 3 Using the toolbar at the top of the
175. earrange See Viewing a Menu on page 179 Click the Reorder button 24 The Reorder Items screen appears Reorder Items Products Bc Planes Save Visit Ektron cam The Trinity Exhaust Pipe RC Cheetah ROC Sportster Products Page T 4 Click the item you want to move 5 Click the up arrow to move it up or the down arrow to move it down 6 When finished click the Save button 1 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 184 Working with Menus Deleting a Menu Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can delete a menu via e its content folder e menus module You cannot delete a menu from the navigation link on a Web page Deleting a Menu via Content Folder To delete a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 180 Click the Delete button D A confirmation message is displayed Click OK to delete the menu NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse however the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its inks to content blocks but has no effect on the content blocks Deleting a Menu via Menus Module To delete a menu via its menus module follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 183 2 Click the Delete b
176. ears on the View Content screen illustrated below View Content Contact Ektron LY ii be log OF ee e 4 eS Ee e vi awil English Us Content E Search Data Content Contact Ektron Add 5e lect language i noaa a Ektron encourages you to contact us with your questions and feedback about Ektron s Web content authoring and management solutions The View Content screen provides several toolbar options that you can perform on the content block These options are explained in After you enter the content you have the following options on page 34 Approvals Reports Each content block awaiting your approval appears on this report Thus you can quickly find all such content blocks without searching through all folders and continue with the proper workflow The View All Content Awaiting Approval screen displays the following information about these content blocks Description Title Title of content block Request Type Request made for the content block Either Publish or Delete Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 105 Content Workflow Reports G Start Date Start date if any assigned to the content block Determines when content will go live on Web site Submitted By User who submitted content for approval Path to content folder where content block resides Below is an example of the View All Content Awaiting Approval screen View All Content Awaiting Ap
177. ecesssseeceeneeseeneeseenenees 391 Specifying the Width of a Cell ccccccseseeceeseeseeeseneeenees 391 NS OU irene etexeacrorstniaieeeremanve eeenen caren enan 392 EV UNG a Wi sissandi aaa 393 Setting a Cell s Border Color cccccsssecceeseeceeseeseessenseeseeees 394 Specifying a Cell s Background Color cscccccseeseeeeeseeeeeeees 395 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell cssseeeeeseees 397 Using th Color 0 eerie one eer eer ner er ea tee ree ere nee 398 Spanning ROWS or COlUNMNS cccccseseeseeeeeceenseseenseeseeneeseesees 399 Spanning More than One Row or Column 0cccceesseseeeeeeeeees 400 Aligning Text Within a Cell cccccssssseessessesseeseeseeseeseeneeees 401 Setting Horizontal Alignment ccccccceceseeeeceeeaeeeeeeesseaeeeeeeeeeas 401 Setting Vertical Alignment rccicsiccecsmorcececacnonsnccencesuesscncsanannanececemsentde 403 SPINNI a CE llain a 404 Merging TWO Cells sessicemarceenapinarseiacneninotceinnrsincirtiarsedieteviwians 405 A A a ean 406 Setting Cell Padding and Spacing ccccsssseeecsesseeeeeeesnees 407 Using BOOKINGS ii cstsectinsicstancdienicisncniiesliexciieenteieienenean 409 Creating a BOOKMALK cccccseseeeeeseeeseesseeeesseseenseesenseeseneees 409 Changing the Destination WiINdOW sccsesseessesseneeeeees 411 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 viii Using HyperlinkS siers tae
178. ection Report screen appears Collections Report Title ID Description Path Products al Products navigation Products THis I5 an example of using the Main Jobs listing 2 collection object for creating teasers in Human_ Resources a page Support Packages 3 Support The screen has four columns The following table describes each column Title given to collection by user who created or last edited it ID number assigned by Ektron CMS300 Developers use this number to reference the collection in ecmCollection custom function Description given to collection by user who created or last edited it Folder location of the collection To learn more about the collection and perform tasks on it proceed o Viewing a Collection on page 142 You can also add a collection from the Collections Report screen See Also Creating a Collection on page 144 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 141 Working with Collections Viewing a Collection To view a collection follow these steps 1 Select a collection using the procedure described in Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 139 or Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 141 2 The View Collection screen appears View Collection Products English US Tithe B RC Sportster B RC Cheetah B Rc Lilly B RC Redstar More info Title Products ID 1 Template CMS300Sample p
179. ections e The top left frame shows the folder structure You can click any folder to display its content blocks in the right frame while its sub folders appear below it e The right frame shows content blocks in the currently selected folder Above the right frame is a toolbar of buttons that represent tasks you can perform on a selected content block e The lower left frame shows Ektron CMS300 s top level folders Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 26 Working with Folders and Content Blocks View Contents of Folder Content H En Content 5 Human Resources I _ Title Language ID Status Date Modified Last Editor 5 Marketing Contact Ektron 1 15 O 26 May 2004 11 22 AM Administrat Products Greeting 1 24 O 04 Dec 2003 10 57 AM Administral H RC Cars Home Page Content 1 1 I 04 Dec 2003 10 20 AM Edit John HS Pc Planes Introducing the RC Redstar 1 23 O 04 Dec 2003 10 26 AM Administrat B Support my first content block 1 28 1 07 Oct 2004 04 37 PM Bolt Bob Private Content 1 2 4 03 Mar 2004 03 12 PM Administrat Syndication i Support Page 1 8 27 Aug 2002 02 18 PM Administra ec Trinity In Line Pipe 1 22 1 04 Dec 2003 11 14 4M Administrat In this chapter you learn about adding editing publishing and deleting content blocks through the following subtopics Permissions and Approvals are discussed in later chapters Workarea Toolbar Buttons on page 28 e Viewing a Fol
180. ed By Comments Be sure to check this list every day for John Edit content blocks needing approval Several comments can be added to a task to record its progress from assignment to completion To add a comment to a task follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 224 2 Click the Add Comment button EA 3 The Comments window appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 231 Managing Tasks Comments Times New Roman 3 12 pt A oa E 7 U BAGY sl Insert Close 4 Enter your comment in the editor Note that you can format and spell check the text using the toolbar buttons 5 Click the button 6 The View Task screen reappears with the comment at the bottom of the page Updating Comments To update a comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen that contains the comment you want to update as described in Viewing a Task on page 224 2 Click the comment s Date Time link illustrated below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 232 Managing Tasks View Task ee ll le le Ml ll ll ls ll ls Ml ll Bl ll lM lB Task Tithe Make sure to review your approval list Assigned To f admin Assigned By jedit Priority High Status Mot Started Due Date 11 Jun 2004 Start Date 10 Jun 2004 Description Remember to view your approval list every day and approve any content b
181. ed files See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 249 11 Decide whether the content should be added to the Quicklinks Table and if the content should be searchable See Also Add to Quicklinks Table on page 39 and Content Searchable on page 39 12 Click the Check in fq or Submit for Publishing button a See Also Adding a Content Block on page 37 and Save Check in and Publish on page 243 13 The selected files are imported into AMS Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 256 Using the Asset Management System Editing a Managed File After a managed file is stored in the AMS follow these steps to edit it From the Workarea select the Content folder Select the managed file s folder 3 From the View Contents of Folder screen click the managed file 4 The Content tab displays the file name and a button to let you view the file within its host application Yiew Content topic links Ly ue be Og LT 4 fo eee B View English US i Sad select lat Content Summary Search Data Content File links to topics in POF s txt View read only Asset 5 If you want to view the file before editing it click the View read only Asset button If you do the file opens for display purposes only 6 To edit the file click the Edit button 7 The following screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 2
182. ed language nothing appears But if a content block is not available in the selected language content in the default language appears When creating a collection for a foreign language decide if you want to create e a foreign edition of an existing collection or e anew collection in a foreign language For example if you want to provide several versions of a single page that change depending on the language selected by the user see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists on page 154 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 153 Working with Collections On the other hand if you are creating a collection to appear only on a foreign language page and no other edition of the collection will appear on your site see Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not Exist on page 154 You can only add content blocks in the language of a collection So create the content blocks first then create the collection that links to them Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists ae SS WN Click the content folder in which your collection exists The folder s contents are displayed Click the View Collections button E The View Collections screen is displayed Select the collection that you want to translate From the Add drop down list select the language of the new collection Using the Add button cH select the content blocks to ad
183. editor is one of several fields on a page and your browser is Internet Explorer move to eWebEditPro XML by pressing lt Tab gt until the cursor lands in the editor To move from the editor to the next field press lt Ctrl gt lt Tab gt Using Netscape lf the eWebEditPro XML editor is one of several fields ona page and your browser is Netscape your Webmaster needs to create custom toolbar buttons that let you move into and out of the editor This procedure is described in the eWebEditPro XML Developer s Reference Guide Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 422 Section 508 Compliance Using eWebEditPro XML without a Mouse As explained in Customizing Your Toolbar on page 291 the eWebEditPro XML toolbar consists of one or more toolbar menus Menus have buttons that you click with the mouse to perform actions such as copying text This section explains how to perform those actions without using the mouse 1 With the cursor in the eWebEditPro XML editor press the application key Eh 2 A menu appears Menus Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Select All Clean HTML Hyperlink Insert HTML ow View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag 3 Press the down arrow key to select Menus Menus becomes highlighted Menus Car Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 423 Section 508 Compliance 4 Press lt Enter gt A new menu lists all tooloar menu
184. een appears Click the Add button qq The Add Menu screen appears Behl Be be pals alll Bas e betel N ota pial aoe EARN Meelis lial Bela Se TARANAN PAEAS we eee ERS Nelle Tall Rett alll Reels slit GaSe sell Boal oe Se Ee oe A ew en ARAN TARN Peele TEN N ERNA TEN oe oe ow baal English US JCMS300Sample Select Page The URL link will associate the menu title with a landing page JCMS300Sample Leave the above template empty if you wish to use the Quicklinks Description Title URL Link Template Link eg Using the following table complete the fields on the Add Menu screen Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 161 Working with Menus Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen So The name given to the menu by the creator It appears on the Web page to indicate the kind of information on the menu URL Link After you create a menu your developer links it to text or an image on a Web page by modifying a page template As a result when a user reading that Web page moves the cursor over the text or image the menu appears In the illustration below the menu appears when the user moves the cursor over Products Product Support Mews Careers You can also assign a URL link to a menu using this field If you do and the user clicks the link text or image he jumps to the specified page For example in this field you assign the product landing page CMS400Example products aspx In
185. ees 291 Removing Or Adding Menus ccccsssscessssseeeeeeeeseeneeseees 292 Removing or Adding Menu Items sccceeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 293 Restoring Toolbars asnan 295 Rearranging the Menus on a TooIbabl cccssseeseseeseeseneeees 295 Creating a New Menu ccccsesseeceeseeecesseceenseeeenseesenseeseenees 296 Moving a Menu Off the Toolbar scccssesseeseeseeseeneeseees 297 Changing the Menu s Orientation ccccsssseesseeseeeeeneeseenees 298 The Context Sensitive Menu cscccesseeseseeeeeeeeees 299 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features 302 Copying from Other Applications cccssseesssssesseeneeseeees 303 Finding and Replacing Text cccccsscsesseceseeeesseeseeeeeeeeneees 304 Ne VEN n 304 Finding and Replacing Text ccccssssccesseeeseeseeseeeeeeesenseneeees 304 Additional Options on the Dialog BOX cccceeeeseeeeeeeeeees 305 Specifying a Search DirOCtiOMn ic 2 cccc2ccce cceeccccecececencsssennsoncesaneresos 305 Considering the Case of a Search Term ccccsssseeeeeeseeeeeeeeees 306 Whale Word ClCH carcerati EE 307 Checking Spelling ccccccssecccesseeceesseeeesseesenseeseenseseenees 308 Disabling Script Blocking sccccssseeeeseeceeneeseeneeseeeneeseees 308 Checking Spelling as YOU Type cccceesseeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeneeseenees 308 Checking Spelling Upon Demand
186. ell checking 311 O objects absolute positioning 283 Office 2000 inserting content from 421 open WeblmageFX command 349 oval WebImageFX command 350 overwrite button 30 P padding cell 407 paste toolbar and menu option 278 paste as new image WeblmageFX com mand 351 paste text toolbar and menu option 278 pending start date content 448 physical path library setting 118 pictures inserting see image upload properties image upload 317 pixels 323 pointer selection WeblmageFX comm and 351 polygon WeblmageFX command 352 position objects menu 283 prerequisites 8 preview button 30 floating toolbar 4 feature 10 print editor content 278 profile users updating 262 viewing 262 properties button floating toolbar 4 content block 36 publish button 30 content to web site 78 published content block viewing 31 Q quicklinks 414 adding to content 135 broken finding 44 definition 116 using for a collection 146 viewing 136 R rectangle WeblmageFX command 353 red content border color meaning 442 redisplay toolbars 295 redo WebIlmageFX command 353 registered trademark character inserting 282 remove button 30 remove XSLT from XML content block 98 reorder button 30 replacing text 304 reports content approving content from report 106 awaiting approval 105 checked in content 107 checked out content 108 content to expire 113 declining content from report 106 editing content blocks 105 expired content
187. ement Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 285 Toolbar Buttons Buttons of the Form Elements Toolbar Inserts opening and closing form tags For example lt form name Test action http localhost ewebeditpro4 formtest htm method post gt lt form gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the form Name Action page Method Encode Type Inserts a submit button For example Submit button lt input type submit value Submit gt Inserts a button For example El Button input type button value Test Burton nane Test gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the button e Name e Button caption 5 When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the submit button e Button caption E Inserts a reset button For example Reset button lt input type reset value Reset Page gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information for the reset button e Button caption Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 286 Toolbar Buttons Inserts a hidden text field For example jab Hidden text field lt input type hidden value This 16 initial content name mycontent gt When you click this button a dialog box prompts you to enter the following information
188. en displays the menu items 3 Click the edit icon py next to the content block L1 you want to edit 4 The Edit Menu Item screen opens Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 176 Working with Menus Edit Menu Item Title save Description a Target Popup Self Parent Top Link QuickLink Menu Template 5 Using the table below as a reference make changes to the content menu item Fields on the Edit Menu Item Screen Field Description 0 Title The name that was given to the menu item by the creator Edit if needed Description Add a more detailed description for the content menu item that is being edited Target Select how the library menu item will display Popup Opens in a new browser window Self Opens in the same window Parent Opens in the parent window Top Note By default the target option is set to self See Template Link on page 163 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 177 Working with Menus 6 Click the Save button GJ Editing a Library Asset Menu Item To edit a library menu asset via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu whose items you want to edit by referencing Viewing a Menu on page 179 2 The View Menu screen displays the menu items 3 Click the edit icon 3 next to the library asset KE you want to edit 4 The Edit Menu Item screen opens 5 Make changes to the l
189. ending start date 448 previous version viewing 94 publish see publish reports checked in content 107 checked out content 108 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 content pending start date 111 content to expire 113 expired content 112 new content 109 refresh reminder 111 submitted content 109 restoring previous version 94 scheduling 57 search data see search data searching for within site 45 start date setting 57 statuses 442 approved 442 submitted definition 446 summary see summary to expire report 113 workflow reports see reports content area expanding 42 content block see also content add button 28 adding 37 creating 37 definition 1 deleting 44 several at once 29 editing 40 overview 5 finding 5 lifecycle 6 properties 36 translating 41 viewing 33 contrast WeblmageFX command 342 copy information from other applications 303 toolbar and menu option 278 WeblmageFX command 343 copyright character inserting 282 create new WeblmageFX comm and 343 creating document asset management system 252 Office document asset managem ent system 240 crop WeblmageFX command 344 custom tag attributes dialog 433 menu options 431 customizing toolbar 291 cut toolbar and menu option 278 D decline content ii from approval report 106 from publishing 78 one content block 77 several content blocks 79 delete button floating toolbar 4 content toolbar button 29 folder toolbar button 29 toolbar
190. ent blocks 151 toolbar button 29 toolbar buttons 143 using default template or quicklinks 146 viewing 142 color background cell applying 395 deleting 396 table applying 384 deleting 385 cell border 394 default 374 content block border m eaning 442 depth specifying 363 font changing 282 picture border 324 table border 387 default 372 columns table adding 377 deleting 377 spanning 399 specifying 376 comments adding another 440 adding to a task 230 inserting into content 438 updating 441 viewing 440 Compare source code field eWebDiff 91 Compare visual aspect field eWebDiff 90 comparing content 87 content area explained 92 Diff tab 92 how status affects comparison 88 published tab 92 setup window 90 staged tab 93 toolbar 89 view tabs 92 when available 87 window explanation 88 content see also content block active definition 443 adding as menu option 167 adding to collection 147 approval process 79 archived toolbar button 28 archiving see archiving awaiting approval 15 checked in definition 444 checked out definition 446 collaboration 438 comparing see comparing con tent currently checked out 16 declining see declining content difference view button floating toolbar 4 viewing 87 editing toolbar button 29 end date setting 60 folder add button 28 screen display 26 View History Restore 99 history accessing from Web page 95 accessing via Workarea 95 marked for deletion definition 448 p
191. erform actions on the area such as blur and delete t crop Removes everything outside of Crop on page 344 selected area of an image Deletes selected area of an image Delete on page 344 View Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see reset zoom ratio Displays image at full size Reset Zoom Ratio on page 354 Be e Increases an image s magnification Zoom In on page 363 zoom out Decreases an image s magnification Zoom Out on page 363 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 305 Editing Images Image Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see image info Displays information about an Image Info on image page 348 dimensions Modifies an image s width and Dimensions on height page 345 color depth Changes the number of colors Color Depth on available to an image page 341 blur Blurs or softens an image Blur on page 337 sharpen Sharpens edges within an image Sharpen on page 357 brightness Changes an image s brightness Brightness on page 338 contrast Changes the difference between Contrast on page 342 light and dark areas of an image horizontal flip Reverses an image horizontally left Horizontal Flip on to right page 347 vertical flip Flips an image vertically top to Vertical Flip on bottom page 362 rotate Turns an image a specified number Rot
192. erver File button You are prompted to enter a User Name and Password Your Webmaster assigns these codes to you which are needed to copy the file to the Web server Next the Image Explorer dialog appears illustrated below Navigate through the folder structure until you find the image Then click OK to insert the image into eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 321 Inserting Images Image Explorer Fa foldersyindes simle jpg cue Select The Picture Properties Dialog Box You can also use the Picture Properties dialog box to e adjust the picture s width height border thickness and alignment e reset the image s properties width height border thickness and alignment to their original specifications e set spacing between the picture and surrounding information on the page e enter or edit the picture s title e view technical information about your connection Adjusting a Picture The layout area of the Picture Properties dialog box lets you adjust a picture s width height border thickness and alignment Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 322 Inserting Images Layout Width fi E Height fi G fo Border Thickness Alignment Not set bi Reset You can use the following fields to adjust the picture before inserting it into the editor To make this change Use this field The width of the picture in pixels Width Add a bo
193. es from the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 17 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Ektron CMS Workarea Site Map Smart Desktop 6 Tasks 45 Reports content reports content folders form folders ae Library library folders Modules Modules Collections H Menus Settings lt lt 2 Calendars a Users 1S e d Membersnips User Groups P 6 Help HS Configuration From the Smart Desktop you can also e Modify the Display of Top Level Folders on page 18 e Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea on page 20 Modify the Display of Top Level Folders The display of top level folders can appear in two formats e a full button with an icon and text 8 Sou h Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 18 The Workarea and Smart Desktop e just an icon on the bottom of the left frame The full display is easier to see but the icon format allows more space for the folder structure You can decide which option best suits your needs Switching Between Full Buttons and Icons By default top level folders appear as full buttons To switch the display of all folders to icons double click the down arrow circled below To switch back to full buttons double click the up arrow circled above You can also switch the display of the folders one at a time by clicking the up or down arrow As an alternative method of switching the dis
194. escenseeseeseeseenseeseenees 237 ce cess cette asec E E A E E 239 Working with Office DocumentS sssssssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 239 Notes on Working with Office Documents c ssceeeeeseeeeeees 240 Creating a New Office Document ccccceeeeceeeseeseeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeas 240 Importing One Office Document into the AMS ccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 245 Importing Several Office Documents into the AMS 006 247 Importing Files Individually vs Several at ONCE eee 249 The Work Ofline OOM ON s scpiectccjacontinccgecces ea 250 Editing an OMice DOC ssazcociseccauserseunerossaterndsetenessecsterieokaanes 250 Working with Managed FilesS ccsssscssssessseseseeeeseeseesenees 252 Creating a New Managed File ccccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeas 252 Importing One Managed File nnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnnnnennnnsnnnnesnnennennne 252 Importing Several Managed Fil S cccccccsssseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeaeeees 254 BOG a Managed FING scrini nie ern 257 PS SOU WY OV ROW ve vcisnsncenetrusisenctcccssmeacsesncsasnespncvsewarcusaawensneniansnns 259 Viewing AMS Assets within the CMS ccsssseesesseeseseeees 259 Deleting an AMS ASSet cccscccsesseeesseseseeeeeeeseeseeseeeeoeseenenees 260 Approving AMS Assets cccccessesseseeeeseeseeeeeeeneeeeseeeeaneneensens 260 Adding Assets to Collections and Menus 0000008 260
195. ew Difference button Ea appears in the content history area or the Web page view The Compare Content Window NOTE The first time the View Content Difference feature is opened a simple installation program runs See Also First Use of the View Content Difference Feature on page 93 The Compare Content window consists of the following e Toolbar e Content area Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 88 Comparing Versions of a Content Block e View content tabs cos Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Toolbar alal2l x Welcome to RC international EC ational is dedicated to the EC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve EC racing In three short ye EC ational has become one of the leading manufactures of EC racing and flying velucles Our dedication to the sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the EC community We will continue striving to improve our affordable products and hope you will become an EC internMational member Content Area View Tabs iff Published Staged Each area Is explained below Toolbar The content comparison toolbar has five buttons explained below ioe tem eee Print Sends content to local or network printer Note This option prints the currently displayed content whether it is the compared published or staged content Save Saves a copy in HTML format on your local machine or network When saved as
196. ex raitencntnnsncanmtiecatiniminsadtvendtannioennniconentns 109 Content Pending Start Date Repott cccccessseeeeeeeeeeeees 111 Refresh Reminder Report ccsssccssseeseseccesseeeseeeceeeseanenseees 111 Expired Content Report ccccssssceccsssseeeceesseesscenseesseeneeeeses 112 Content to Expire Report cccccsssecsessecceeseeseessseeeeneesennees 113 Library Folder caneseeceensscesnaareaiereutincoreamersieisiiemsdyeiieneitensene 115 Terms Used in this Chapter cccssseesceseeseeeseesenseeseeneeses 115 Accessing The Library sssunsnnnsnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna 116 Library Folder Properties occ cciccrcersscosneusowsienetunsornicetdactocsosaceadacssencecs 117 Searching the LIN AN Y sicissisisissasiaroniiianasiiiiorannisina aa 119 A T EAEE AE E E E N EE 120 CO yi Files to the LIDA seniscniirnmieninanronann 120 e aeaa e NE E EEE E aap E ET 123 I ll a sneer 125 Venni FIEGEN ARER A fame 126 upra aig aie le ce 9 6 erei aire rer nana elena er scenes reer 129 Deleting Library MEMS ctsicrmenivet nnn E 129 Adding a Library File to Content siascchecsssiniteledcisabscttosaiesinepanaspiacce 130 MYPEFIOKS passaiani 133 TE E S EAE OE E AE EE E A E E A E 134 Quicklinks and FONE anannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn ennenen 135 Working with Collections cccseeceeeeeseeeeseeeneeenees 138 Finding Collections sssassssnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
197. f a content block To see a change by change comparison of two content blocks use the View Content Difference feature explained in Comparing Versions of a Content Block on page 87 NOTE The Purge History feature deletes historical versions of content blocks according to user defined criteria Therefore some previous versions may be unavailable See Also Ektron CMS300 Administrator manual gt Managing Content Folders gt Folder Properties gt Purge History The View and Restore features are explained through the following subtopics e Accessing Content History on page 94 e The Content History Window on page 96 e Viewing a Historical Version of a Content Block on page 97 e Restoring a Previous Version on page 99 e Comparing Historical Versions on page 99 e Removing Applied XSLT on page 99 Accessing Content History By default all users can view the history of an Ektron CMS300 content block You can access content history from two places e The View Content page in the Workarea e The icon menu for a content block on a Web page Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 94 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks Once you access the content history the functionality is identical The following sections explains how to access the content history from both places Accessing the Content History from the Workarea To access the content history from the Workarea foll
198. follow operating instructions ili negligence or accident or iv modifications to the Software by any person or entity other than Company In the event of a breach of warranty Customer s sole and exclusive remedy is repair of all or any portion of the Software If such remedy fails of its essential purpose Customer s sole remedy and Ektron s maximum liability shall be a refund of the paid purchase price for the defective Products only This limited warranty is only valid if Ektron receives written notice of breach of warranty within thirty days after the warranty period expires 5 Limitation of Warranties and Liability THE SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION ARE SOLD AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY WARRANTIES AS TO THE PERFORMANCE MERCHANTIBILITY DESIGN OR OPERATION OF THE SOFTWARE NO WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE IS OFFERED EXCEPT AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 4 ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS AND IMPLIED ARE HEREBY DISCLAIMED NEITHER COMPANY NOR ITS SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS LOSS OF BUSINESS OR GOODWILL LOSS OF DATA OR USE OF DATA INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS NOR FOR ANY OTHER INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND UNDER OR ARISING OUT OF OR IN ANY RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT HOWEVER CAUSED WHETHER FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY BREACH OR REPUDIATION OF CONTRACT TORT NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE EVEN IF COMPANY OR ITS REPRESENTATIVES HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS 6 Miscell
199. form these tasks e Editing a Task on page 230 e Deleting a Task on page 233 e Adding Comments to Tasks on page 230 See Also Task View Options on page 225 Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 228 Sorting Tasks By Column on page 229 Task View Options Beneath the main task module folder several view screens display all tasks filtered by specified categories After viewing tasks in any category most screens let you perform an action on the tasks the actions are included in the table below For example you can change a tasks state to another state To select all tasks ona screen click the check box in the header row illustrated below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 225 Managing Tasks CID State Prion Prep to Move Downstairs On Hold Low Displays these tasks Action you can perform from view screen All tasks assigned to you that are in one Click on the task to view it of the following states Add a task not started active Sort tasks by Task Type awaiting data Sort tasks by column on hold reopened pending Assigned To Me All open tasks assigned to you Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Assigned By Me All open tasks you assigned to yourself or Click on the task to view it others Sort tasks by Task Type Sort tasks by column Created by Me All open tasks you created Click on the task to view it Sort tasks by T
200. ft Internet Explorer i e x E WARNING You are about to overwrite a library file TE The filename of the local file will be changed to match the existing filename This will ensure that web links to this library item do not break Continue 12 To overwrite the file click OK Library Link Searching Link searching indicates all content blocks that include a library link It is useful when you want to delete a library item With the click of a button you see all content blocks that you need to update to reflect the change you are making Performing a Library Item Link Search To perform a library item link search follow these steps 1 Access the View Library Item for any type of library item as described in Viewing Files on page 123 2 Click the Link Search button a A list of all content blocks that reference the library item is displayed You should edit those content blocks before deleting the item Deleting Library Items You can delete obsolete items from the library By deleting an item you prevent users from adding it to their content A deleted Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 129 Library Folder hyperlink quicklink or form quicklink remains on your Web server so any existing links to them are not broken On the other hand if an item is a file or image the delete window displays an additional prompt Remove from the server that lets you remove the item from the server
201. goes into a checked out state After creating the summary check the content block back in From that point you must submit it or publish it Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 67 Adding or Editing Search Data Adding or Editing Search Data You can add two kinds of search data to Ektron CMS300 content e Search data that can appear on your Web site s search page below the standard search fields to help site visitors find content on your Web site illustrated below ooo f All the words any of the words C Exact Phrase C Match Partial Words Contains Does Mot Contain This search data can also appear on the Search screen used to find content and library items within the Workarea For more information see Entering Custom Search Data on page 69 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 68 Adding or Editing Search Data e Search data that resides in the source code of a Web page Examples include the title and meta tags This data makes it easier for search engines to find your Web page illustrated below Welkome to RC International Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back F t index 1 Notepad Address File Edit Format View Help RG lt Copyright 2002 Ektron Inc CMS sample site All information in the sample site is fictional gt lt html gt F kTitle gt welcome to RC Inte
202. h aa am la a mM oe ee Caa ea T mA M e ANDA a ARA Each folder lists the following information about its content blocks Field Description O The name of the content block The language of the content block The number assigned to the content block by Ektron CMS300 It is used to retrieve the content block from a database Status The status of the content block See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 442 Date The most recent date the content block was added Modified edited or published Last Editor The last user who accessed the content block Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 32 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Each folder also provides the following toolbar options NOTE Depending on your permissions you may not see all toolbar buttons E Add Content Opens the editor and creates a new Adding a Content content block in the current folder Block on page 37 Add Folder Adds a sub folder to the current Adding Sub Folders folder on page 54 Archived Content If current content is being displayed Setting Archive switch to display archived content Options on page 61 If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content ij Delete Folder Deletes the current folder Deleting Folders on nme DGE Note You cannot delete the Content folder E Collections Adds edits or deletes a collection Working with from the current folder Collecti
203. he Insert Table button E3 3 Click Merge Cells from the menu Word Wrap Word Wrap is a text formatting feature of tables It causes text to move down to the next line when the width of the characters on a line equals the column width For example if you set column width to 50 with word wrap turned on a table looks like this If you turn Word Wrap off for the same table you get this result oc eer lf Word Wrap is turned off text stays on one line until the user entering table text presses lt Enter gt That keystroke causes text to move down to the next line Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 406 Working with Table Cells By default all cells have the Word Wrap feature turned on To turn Word Wrap on or off for a cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu a 2 YS The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click or off the Word Wrap checkbox and click OK Cell Properties Span Rowe Spanned Columns Spanned Layout Width M Word Wrap setting Cell Padding and Spacing Cell padding is the space between a cell s data and its border 1 the pdoe pixel Cell spacing is the space between a cell and surrounding cells Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 407 Working with Table Cells Assigning Cell Padding To assign cell padding t
204. he Search Text field because the search ignores them To find the list of noise words search your computer for files named noise xxx where xxx is a three letter abbreviation for the language For example noise eng lists English noise words You can open a noise file with a simple word processor program such as Notepad to view any language s noise words You can also edit the file For example you can remove words that users should be able to search on Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 48 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Specifying Match Criteria NOTE This field is only applicable if you entered one or more words in the text field From this dropdown list select criteria for how the search word or words must appear within the content of the files being searched I Include Archived Keywords search All Words yh fo F g m Any word Exact Phrase Date Created Contains match Date Modified Any AAA Titl Your choices are described below Choice A search returns content that has All Words all words in the search field Any Word any word in the search field Exact Phrase all words in the order specified in the search field Contains match partial any part of any word in the search field words Match Criteria Examples The examples below assume you entered these words into the search text field e partners e content e Monday Ektron CMS300 User
205. he cursor to the cell and right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu A w V Select the value in the Background Image field and press lt Backspace gt Using the Color Box Follow these steps to get help on how to use the color box 1 Click the question mark in the top right corner Basic colors EE EHHH Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 398 Working with Table Cells 2 A large question mark appears next to your cursor 3 Drag the question mark to the area of the dialog box that you want to learn about 4 Click the mouse button A box appears with instructions for that area Spanning Rows or Columns You can create a table cell that stretches across more than one row or column In the following table notice how the row that contains Sports Teams spans three columns Sports Teams Baseball Team Hockey Team White Sox Black Hawks You can also create a column that spans several rows as illustrated below Notice that Boston spans three rows Colleges Boston Boston fee Northeastern University Boston University Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 399 Working with Table Cells Colleges Spanning More than One Row or Column To have a table cell soan more than one row or column follow these steps 1 Place the cursor in the cell that will span rows or columns 2 Right click the mouse 3 Cli
206. he dictionaries it displays the Spelling dialog box Spelling Not in Dictionary fmn O leal O leal All Suggestions Change Change all Change all Cancel Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 309 Checking Spelling The Spelling Dialog Box The Spelling dialog box displays e the word not in the dictionary in the Not in Dictionary field e suggested spellings for the word in the Suggestions field The most likely replacement is selected at the top of the list e buttons that let you ignore the word change the word or exit Replace the word with one of the suggestions and continue 1 Click the suggested word spell checking the page Click Change Replace every occurrence of the word with one of the 1 Click the suggested word Suggestions and continue spell checking the page Click Change All Correct the spelling of the word by typing it and continue Click in the Not In Dictionary spell checking the page field Correct the spelling Click Change Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page Click Ignore You would normally do this if a word such as a company name is spelled correctly even though it is not in the dictionary Leave the word as is continue spell checking the page Click Ignore All ignoring all other occurrences of the word Stop spell checking Click Cancel Spell Checking Selected Text To check the spelling for a single word or a group of wo
207. herever instant email is available one of the email icons appears Modifying Instant eMail When the email screen appears the following information is copied from Ektron CMS300 into the email Source of Default Information Editable User you selected to receive the email If the user does Yes not have valid email address an error message appears on the screen see below If you then insert a valid email address the email is sent If desired you can add recipients by typing them we PC eee ie eee ested into this field 1 Administrator Ektron com If you specify a group to receive the message as long as one group member has a valid email address all group members with valid addresses receive the email Subject If the email message is linked to a content block its title appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 24 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Field Source of Default Information Editable Body of If the email message is linked to content block a link to Yes message the content block appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 25 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Working with Folders and Content Blocks Every content block resides in the Content folder or one of its sub folders So to work with an existing content block or create a new one you must first navigate to its folder A typical content folder screen appears below It consists of three s
208. i The vertical scroll bar appears on the left POPER EA side of the window Form Elements Toolbar Sese 7 fab a e EE iy This toolbar lets you insert the elements of an HTML form into the editor You begin by clicking the Forms button Next add the fields and buttons that make up your form The buttons are described in Buttons of the Form Elements Toolbar on page 286 NOTE _ This documentation does not explain how to create HTML forms Many books and Web sites are dedicated to this subject such as http www w8schools com html html forms asp Updating Form or Element Information lf you want change a form or an element click the form or element within the editor then click the element s toolbar button For example to update the textarea field in the illustration below click the field then click the text area button circled in red below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 284 Toolbar Buttons AS RB MA SB oa wee eb Spply Style Normal poe blew Roman Bi isi e fo fof Submit fform When you do a dialog appears with the element s information Update as needed Replacing Form or Element Information To replace a form element with another follow these steps 1 Click the element to be replaced 2 Click the new element s toolbar button 3 Complete the dialog that appears When you close the dialog the new element and its information replace the old el
209. i view Test Word Doc for Asset Management Preview Turned off View Content Test Asset Management Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 251 Using the Asset Management System 5 Click the Edit button C 6 The document opens in the host application Edit the document as well as its summary search data schedule tasks or comments See Also e Adding a Content Block Summary on page 64 e Adding or Editing Search Data on page 68 e Managing Tasks on page 213 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 57 8 If desired edit the documents properties See Also Editing a Document s Properties on page 243 9 Check in or submit the content for publishing as you would any content block See Also Save Check in and Publish on page 243 Working with Managed Files This section explians how to work with managed files through the following subtopics e Creating a New Managed File on page 252 e Importing One Managed File on page 252 e Importing Several Managed Files on page 254 e Editing a Managed File on page 257 Creating a New Managed File Unlike an Office document you cannot create a managed file within Ektron CMS300 Instead you must create it on your computer using the host application After creating the file import it into the AMS Importing One Managed File To import a managed file into AMS follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual
210. ibrary asset menu item For documentation of the fields see Fields on the Edit Menu Item Screen on page 177 6 Click the Save button 1 Editing an External Hyperlink Menu Item To edit an external hyperlink menu item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu that you want to edit by referencing Viewing a Menu on page 179 2 The View Menu screen displays the menu items 3 Click the edit icon py next to the external hyperlink W you want to edit 4 The Edit Menu Item screen opens Update as needed Use the table below to guide you through the fields Name Deseription Title Title of the new external hyperlink menu item URL Link The URL link for the external hyperlink For example www google com Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 178 Working with Menus 5 Click the Save button 2 Editing a Submenu Menu Item To edit a submenu menu item via its content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Navigate to the menu for which you want to edit the menu items for by referencing to Viewing a Menu on page 179 2 The View Menu screen opens displaying a list of all menu items 3 Click the submenu icon 4 to display its contents See this section Content Editing a Content Block Menu Item on page 176 block Library Editing a Library Asset Menu Item on page 178 Asset External Editing an External Hyper
211. ies to individual cells within a table See Working with Table Cells on page 391 for details Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns Use the Size section of the Insert Table dialog box to specify the number of rows and columns in the table Insert Table Sze Bows 2 Columns 2 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 376 Manipulating Your Table s Format A row is a horizontal series of cells while a column is a vertical series If you know how many rows and columns the table will be enter those numbers If you don t know the number of rows and columns you need when you create the table estimate how many you need You can add or remove rows and columns later Placement of Inserted Row or Column If you add a row it appears above the row in which the cursor was resting when you pressed Insert Row lf you add a column it appears on the left side of the table Adding or Removing Rows and Columns To add or remove rows and columns after you create the table follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 377 NOTE Manipulating Your Table s Format 1 Place the cursor in the cell from which you want to add or delete 2 Right click the mouse A menu appears Eii Bopp Haste Select All Insert Ao Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HTML
212. ills the screen except for the browser border E Netscape File Edt View Go Communicator Help a 3 Search Netscape Frint Security Shop Stop If you resize the browser to half the screen the table will be about 7 wide You still see both columns but some of the data is moved Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 379 Manipulating Your Table s Format down 5 Netscape File Edit View Go Communicator Help a A 2 ww wW Reload Home Search Netscape ied Back Table Properties Setting Table Width by Percentage To specify table width by percentage choose Percent in the layout section of the Insert Table dialog box Then specify the percentage at the Width field Insert T able Size Rows 2 Columns 2 Layout 100 C Not Specified f Percent C Pixels Pee ee Serene Le ere ees Pae Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 380 Manipulating Your Table s Format Specifying Table Width by Pixels Specify table width by pixels if you want the table to remain the same size if a user resizes the browser For example if you specify that a table is 610 pixels wide and the user s browser is set to low resolution 640 x 480 pixels the table occupies the full width of the browser when it is maximized If the user resizes the browser so that it only occupies the left half of the screen only the left half of the table appears
213. in it is deleted from Ektron CMS300 If you are the last approver in the approval chain the content block is deleted immediately See Also Approving Declining Content Blocks on page 76 Checking for Broken Quicklinks The Check Links button locates all content blocks that include a quicklink to the displayed content block This feature is Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 44 Working with Folders and Content Blocks useful when deleting a content block because it informs you of every content block that will include a dead link after you delete the selected content You should then edit those content blocks and remove or change the obsolete quicklinks To use the link checker follow these steps 1 Access the View Content page for the content block whose links you want check as described in Viewing a Content Block on page 33 2 Click the Check Links button a 3 A page lists each content block that links to the current content block Click the title to access the View Content page for the selected content block From there you can remove or change the quicklink Search Content Folder lf a content contributor logs into the Workarea and clicks the search button 4 the following screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 45 Working with Folders and Content Blocks W Content M Forms M Assets Include Archived Search String Sear All Words T
214. ing On the script blocking window uncheck Enable Script Blocking Press OK Checking Spelling as You Type You can have the editor check spelling as you type To turn on the spell check as you type feature click the automatic spell check button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 308 Checking Spelling When you click the button the spell checker reviews every word in the file A wavy red line appears under any word whose spelling is not found in the system s dictionary The spell checker continues to review each word as you type it marking any words not in the dictionary NOTE Depending on the speed of your computer there may be a short delay between the time you type an incorrect word and when the wavy red line appears Also the spell check does not check a word until you enter a space character after the word Fixing Spelling Errors There are two ways to fix a spelling error indicated by a wavy red line e Click the misspelled word and then right click A menu displays words that are similar to the misspelled word Click the correct word e lf you know the correct spelling type the correction Checking Spelling Upon Demand lf you do not want to use the spell check as you type feature you can begin spell checking whenever you wish To do this click the spell check button When you do the system checks each word in the file If the spell check finds a word in none of t
215. ing a Content Block on page 37 2 In the editor place the cursor where you want to insert the comment On the editor toolbar click the Insert Comment button The Ektron CMS Comment window opens Insert a comment Use the toolbar to format the text if desired Click the Insert button The comment is saved Click the Close button The comment window closes and a comment icon is placed where the comment was added to the content Ki Ca ay fee E E E T ac Ce E H i O E E SSS Sz e icome to RC internationd i gt 2 EC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RC ra 1435 become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing Oo ON OAR Y Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 439 Inserting Comments within Content Each comment appears in the table at the top of the window From this window you can add another comment and update an existing one See the next section for more details Viewing a Comment After a comment is inserted into a content block it can be viewed by any user who can edit the content block To view a comment follow these steps 1 Edit the content block that contains the comment 2 Within the content double click the comment icon 7 7 ee BOS o DA oH EE zaage RC racing enthusiasts We eat work play and live RE ra las become one of the leading manufactures of RC racing 3 The Comments window opens Adding Another Comment To commen
216. ing a Content Block Summary A summary provides a short description of a content block to supplement the title when displaying a list of content blocks on a Web page When you create or edit a content block you can create a Summary Then your Web site developer can create Web pages that contain just the summaries to attract readers to the full story A good example is a news Web site A page on that site could list the titles of the top stories followed by a summary of each illustrated below TOP STORIES Ektron Named a Rising Star 08 15 2003 August 15 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Ekeronr Ime Aan nO Eor Nn Nen aae Olle nis management and authoring has been named a Pris Iing tar aS ppoe On seme pre eroon New England Technology Fast 50 Program Ektron Launches International Distribution Program 08 08 2003 August 8 2003 Amherst New Hampshire USA Icom Iie 5 Ele sie wereOi tin Chanelle Wels content authoring and management with over 350 000 users today announced the Eeoae a Gad shes hinicSieiene Lome Ik Clhisic ie sLlowtic soil Program Like content blocks summaries can include images and files as well as different font styles and sizes This chapter explains how to create summaries and how they can help navigation within your site Your system administrator determines how to display the summaries on your site Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 64 Adding a Content Block Summary
217. ing an Image to the Servel ccsscsceeeseeseeeeeeeseeeeeeenneeeees 329 Deleting a PICTU G assssesscsecesansacasescatecccansccasescciessctacacinsntnesncnnsccans 329 EANO IMAGES rann iR EE 331 Using WeblmageFX scssisncscnksccewsnniarensnxincueseseoxepesactersasbicneenncenes 331 Saving the IMAQE ccccccccssssssseeceeeceeeeesseeeeeeeeecseuauueeeeeeeeeesuaaaasees 333 Toolbar Buttons and Menu Commands csccccseeseeeteeeeeees 333 EU EPERE E P EEPE APTE A ATERATEN TEET IETT ENE ETETE TETE E caf EU E o EE EEE E EA E A E E 338 Choose COlOM cecccccccceeeeceeeeeeeeceeeceeeeseceeeeeeeeeesessaeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeas 339 CHOOSE FONT resisnriar anonanse i Eia an aE ai 340 Color Depth ssisdsatvcvnisveniesinnctivindsivedninaessvanisunessinvneiaastnndbeativennies 341 BI PEPEE ARE E EE EAE TI E A AE E T 342 Bele ETER OE OEE EEE NE T ATE EAN EP REREN TERT 343 Create TS asses a ve genase tetecaes ec E EEE oar 343 COTS EE E E EEA E E EE E EAEE EAE cmniate 344 D E E AE EE A ERE A E EEEN A A O EEE S E 344 DIMENSIONS cscaictasctapsstsntacdadgessactaiondebidledstesusiedacandsessainddsbeataasudyeneedcs 345 Be EEE arated AE P E TEN E E pau EAE e EE eeu E EAEN E E were 346 Exit without SAVE ccceeccccceeseceeceseceecaeeceeceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaeeeesaaeeeeeaaes 346 FEN E A E E E PE E E E RE E EEEE AA A T T TE 347 Horizontal UH ined guivndetetanamerytinkss ine ckennipasqtmtieagieciadaniespesintuniorbindes 347 FO ye Recessions E E A S E E E E E E 348
218. ing or Editing Search Data 1 Access the View Content screen for the content block whose search data you want to enter or edit as described in Viewing a Content Block on page 33 2 Click the Search Data tab Home Fage 22 English U 5 4 int Summary Search Data Data Schedule Apply Style Heading 4 Arial h A Se mRMMA GOH L eam ERSTA Dap WSa SSN Has Eu Ena R ff O MESO Maes sean ease SETS oases euestardesav osm aaa atocesaas ries 3 The Edit Search Data screen opens with the current search data displayed In order to add search data to a content block an administrator must have created definitions for it in the language of the content block NOTE Your screen may differ from the example below Your system administrator determines the appearance of the Edit Search Data screen Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 73 Adding or Editing Search Data Edit Content Eo Ba El odin eA t LS LE m T Title Welcome page English U 5 3 Content Summary Search Data Schedule Comment Ps Title Defaut current character count 7 500 mas Keywords sqiator _ Defaut current character count 9 500 mas Search Data City of origin No selection Editor s name No Selector Part Number RROBA 4 Editthe search data Note that e Required fields are marked with an asterisk Someone must place at least one response in such fields before the c
219. ins how to view a calendar and enter calendar events from the Workarea Once a calendar is available on your Web site you can also perform these actions by logging in and navigating to the calendar on your site To view a calendar follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar screen for the calendar you want to see as described in Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 193 2 Click the View Calendar E button 3 The calendar appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 197 Working with Calendars Show Calendar Monday Tuesday Wednesday qF Thursday 4 lf you want to view events of a certain type only click the Filter by Event Type drop down list illustrated below Then choose an event type See Also Understanding Event Types on page 203 All Event Types g bd All Event Types staff meeting ee company meeting a froth asa colokherstian The page is refreshed and the calendar displays events of that type only Filter By Event Type NOTE The style sheet applied to the calendar in the Workarea is different from the one applied to the calendar on the sample Web site Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 198 Working with Calendars From here you can perform the following tasks Note that the Add and View buttons appear on each calendar day while the Return button is on the toolbar at the top of the screen Add Calendar Event Adding a Cale
220. ion s 9 Lan Cancel Replace a Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 306 Finding and Replacing Text Whole Word Match By default the search finds any occurrence of the text that you type into the Find what field For example if you enter the the search finds the word the as well as those letters embedded in other words such as others and theater lf you want the search to find only whole word occurrences of the text you type into the Find what field click the Match whole words only box in the Find dialog box Find And Replace ww ooo Replace with T Match whole word only _ Beplace Match case e Direction s 9 Lan Cancel Replace Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 307 Checking Spelling The eWebEditPro XML editor can check your spelling as you type or whenever you want to check it The rest of this section explains Disabling Script Blocking Check Spelling as You Type Checking Spelling Upon Demand Spell Checking Selected Text Setting Spell Check Options Disabling Script Blocking If Norton Antivirus 2001 is installed on your computer you need to disable script blocking in order to use the spell checker If you do not disable script blocking an error message will appear whenever you check spelling To do this follow these steps m of Launch Norton Antivirus 2001 From the first window click Options On the next window click Script Block
221. is easy to fly and easy to maintain Specifications Airfoil Overall Length Wingspan weight Engine Size Fuel Tank Size Engine Run Time Fefill Time Fuel Type Color Without XSLT Content EC Redstar Low Wing 57 in Y1in 7 8 lbs A0 70 cc 12 oz 15 min full tank 1 secs Standard White highly refined gasoline Standard The RC Redstar is a radio controlled gas powered low wing aircraft This new plane is fc beginners intermediates that are looking for a easy plane to learn with or to have fun wi Redstar is easy to fly and easy to maintain Low Wing 57 in 71 in 7 8 lbs 60 7 0 cc 1 15 min full tank 17 ser Standard White highly refined gasoline Standard Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 100 Content Workflow Reports Content Workflow Reports The reports folder contains several reports to help you manage the workflow of content blocks through Ektron CMS300 In most cases you choose a report that corresponds to a content block status then view all content blocks in that status If appropriate you can perform tasks on selected content blocks For example you can check in checked out content blocks This chapter explains how to access the reports folder in your Workarea what information is on the reports and actions you can perform on them Accessing the Reports Folder To access the Reports folder follow these steps 1 Log in to your Ektr
222. it Task This area indicates your task permissions and if you Permissions From inherit them from user groups to which you belong User Groups For more information see the Ektron CMS300 Administrator Manual chapter Managing Tasks section Task Permissions 7 Click the Update button a Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 266 Accessing Online Help Accessing Online Help The help folder provides access to important and useful information about using Ektron CMS300 It gives you a library of all documentation plus links to relevant pages on Ektron s Web site We provide this information to make it easier to learn about our Content Management system To access the help folder follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 267 Accessing Online Help 1 Access your Smart Desktop See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 14 Smart Desktop for John Edit gt Smart Desktop s Tasks Content Awaiting Approval 3 S45 Reports Approvals Checked In Content le checked Out Corte L Content Currently Checked Out 3 New Content Repor Submitted Content Content Pending St 7 Tasks 0 Expired Content Fep 2 From the lower left frame click Settings Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 268 Accessing Online Help 3 From the top left frame click Help nn x gt Settings o User Profile Se Help
223. ithe Ary a Comments Any uf Date Created Any h Date Modified Any g Language Any g Editor s Last Name Any Summary Any Status Any h City of origin Any Editor s name Any 7 Top Stories Any z Size of Document Any Number of Pages Any Number of slidestany PowerPoint Any Search Screen The search screen prompts you to specify e the kind of content you want to search for example HTML content blocks e asearch word or words e how the search words must match the content in order for an asset to be found by the search e search data criteria The search only returns content that meets your criteria Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 46 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Each feature is explained below Specifying the Kind of Content to Search Near the top of the screen four check boxes let you determine the kinds of content to search M Content M Forms M Assets M Incdude Archived Assets Assets See Also Using the Asset Management System in the Ektron CMS300 User Manual Include Archived Any of the above file types that have been archived See Also Setting Archive Options on page 61 IMPORTANT The search only considers content whose Content Searchable box is checked The Content Searchable box appears on the Edit Content screen above the editor Also the status of the content must be Approved Edit Content Ti
224. k Categories and Task Types let users and administrators sort task by user defined categories and types By clicking the Add link located next to the Task Type drop down box you can add Task Categories and Task Types This allows you to add categories and types without leaving the Add Task screen NOTE Administrators can also add and edit Task Categories and Task Types from the Workarea by clicking Settings gt Configurations gt Task Types Ektron CMS400 NET Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types To add a Task Category and a Task Type follow these steps 1 Go to the Add Task screen as described in Creating the Task via the Task Folder on page 215 2 Click the Add link next to the Task Type drop down box Add Task Assigned To f jedit Select User or Group Language English U S Content Select Priority Task Category Task Type NotSpecifed Add edit State Start Date E Due Date O H Description ol ol 3 The Add Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 220 Managing Tasks Add Task Type T Task Type Add Task Type to Existing Task Category Po Task Type Description Add Task Type to New Task Category C Not Available From this screen you can perform the following e Add a task type to an existing task category e Create a new task category e Add anew task type e Add a
225. k the underline button to underline the word Creating a Hyperlink 1 2 3 4 Type You can also easily add hyperlinks Double click the word hyperlinks so that it becomes selected Click the Hyperlink button iB The hyperlink dialog box appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 273 Creating a Simple Web Page Hyperlink Hyperlink Information Type http k Cancel Link https 7 Bookmark Tert content Target Frame Quick Link select link M 5 Inthe Link field after http enter www ektron com 6 Click OK Notice that the word hyperlink now appears in a different color When you save this Web page and a user views it if the user clicks hyperlink a new Web page will display Ektron s home page NOTE If your computer has an internet connection you can double click the hyperlink to test it Applying a Bullet to a Line of Text Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line Type You can begin a line with bullets 2 3 Click the bullet button 4 Notice that the line is indented and now begins with a bullet You can begn a line with bullets Changing the Size of Text 1 Press lt Enter gt to move the cursor down to the next line 2 Type Finally you can change the font to a large size 3 Select the words large size Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 274 Creating a Simple Web Page
226. k with collections For details see the Collections chapter of the Ektron CMS300 Administrator Manual This section explains how to find create and manage collections through the following subtopics e Finding Collections on page 139 e Viewing a Collection on page 142 e Creating a Collection on page 144 e Editing Content Blocks in a Collection on page 150 e Reordering Collections List on page 151 e Editing Collection Information on page 152 e Deleting a Collection on page 152 e Working with Collections in a Multi Language System on page 153 e Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Features on page 155 Finding Collections Every collection is assigned to a folder If you want to find the collections assigned to any folder navigate to it and click the Collection button h For more information see Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder on page 139 Since collections can be assigned to several content folders the Modules folder provides a central Collections folder which displays all collections on one screen regardless of their content folder For more information see Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder on page 141 Finding a Collection by Navigating to its Content Folder To access collections for a content folder follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 139 Working with Collections 1
227. keep 2 Press the Crop button t 3 Everything outside the selected area is removed Delete Standard Toolbar Button x Description Removes a selected area of an image You must select an area before you delete it The deleted area is not saved for later pasting In contrast if you use the Cut command you can later paste the cut area Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 344 Editing Images Dimensions Standard Toolbar Button Description Lest you change an image s width and or height which are defined in pixels Maintaining Aspect Ratio Use this check box to change an image s size while maintaining its aspect ratio Peeve i egi is jou W Maintain amp spect Ratio M i Irem h 1 I Pbl Onn Aspect ratio is the ratio of an image s width to height For example if a graphic has an aspect ratio of 2 1 its width is twice as large as its height If you check the Maintain Aspect Ratio box just specify a new width the height is calculated automatically Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 345 Editing Images Dialog Box m Dimensions OF xX Dimensions Her width Nem Height P Maintain Aspect Ratio Current width 216 Current Height i4 men _ Exit Standard Toolbar Button ils Description Save the change in the WeblmageFX and return to eWebEditPro XML where the updated image appears Exit without Save Standard Toolbar Button hil Description Igno
228. ktron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 37 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Approval Chain Publish to Web site To add a content block follow these steps Edit 1 Browse to the folder where you want to create the new content block Select a language from the language dropdown list 2 3 Click the Add button C 4 The Add Content window opens 5 Create content in the editor using the following tables Responding to the Fields on the Add Content Screen Description Tite Enter a title for the content block Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 38 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Description Add to Check if you want to save a Quicklink to this Quicklinks content block Table A quicklink is a special kind of hyperlink that jumps to another content block on your Web site A regular hyperlink jumps to a Web page on the internet Content Check this box if the content should be found when Searchable someone searches your Web site After you respond to the above fields the following options are available Options on the Add Content Screen Button or Description Tab Content Add edit content Insert content for the content block For more information about using Ektron CMS300 s editor see Introduction to eWebEditPro XML on page 270 Summary Edit Summary Enter or edit the summary for the content block See Also Adding a Content Block Summary
229. ktron but don t know the exact name or its folder To search the library click the binoculars button from the library Workarea illustrated below Library Folder d th Title I calendars When you do a search screen appears with several fields that let you narrow your search The fields are described below NOTE Some search field check boxes are circles while others are squares If the box is a circle you can only choose one option If it is a Square you can select as many as you want Only library assets that satisfy a search criteria appear on the Search found screen Fat e Keywords Specify keywords that the search will use A keyword can be a complete or partial name The search looks for keywords in the file s internal name for example airplane gif or title The title is assigned by the user when the image is added to the library All Types The search considers all library asset types Images only The search only includes images Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 119 Library Folder roe in Filename Search If you check this box the search considers only the file name not the title assigned when the item is added to the library Only search items The search only considers library assets that last edited by myself were last modified by you One or more of the search criteria set by your system administrator in the Search Data Definitions screen Files This section exp
230. l Version 4 8 Revision 7 137 Working with Collections Working with Collections A collection provides a list of content blocks that can be placed on a Web page to offer readers links to them In the following illustration the circled content is an example of a collection on a Web page Home KL international Products Support Hews T Careers RO Sportster RC Cars RC Cheetah RC Lilly RC Redstar Product Name RG Ghe Description RC Internationals most entry in to the competit racing world is the RC RC Cheetah is designed core RC enthusiast The You can also use a collection to display other listings such as job postings press releases and knowledge base articles The following graphic illustrates the use of a collection on the landing page of Ektron s Knowledge Base Highlighted Knowledge Base Articles IMFO IMFO IMFO IMFO INFO Release notes for eWebEditPro 2ML v4 2 Release notes for eWebEditPra 4 2 elWebEditPro 3 amp 4 JavaScript Object Model elWwebEditPro error messages Windows P Service Pack 2 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 138 Working with Collections This section explains how to create collections Your system administrator would then modify content blocks to display the collections on your Web site using the ecmCollection function NOTE Your system administrator must assign to you permission to wor
231. l Version 4 8 Revision 7 157 Working with Menus e what they are e how they can be used e how to the add edit view and delete a them What s In This Chapter The following information is included in this chapter e The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 158 e Access to the Menus Feature on page 159 e Managing Menus on page 160 e Adding a New Menu on page 160 e Adding a Menu ltem on page 164 e Editing a Menu on page 172 e Editing a Menu Item on page 173 e Viewing a Menu on page 179 e Reordering Menu Items on page 184 e Deleting a Menu on page 185 e Deleting a Menu Item on page 186 e Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 187 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items Menus have the following structure e menu top level structure that is a placeholder for menu items and submenus It is assigned to a content folder If a menu item links to a content block the block must reside in the assigned folder or one of its subfolders A menu also identifies the page template used to display menu options that are content blocks e menu item the individual options on a menu can be any of the following content block Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 158 Working with Menus library asset external hyperlink link to a page outside your Web site submenu a link to another menu In the illustration below the menu
232. lacks on the list Comments Date Timel dded By Comments John Edit Be sure to check this list every day for 10 47 AM content blacks needing approval _ O 3 The Comments window opens with the comment displayed 4 Update the comment 5 Click the button Deleting a Task You can easily delete a task that is no longer needed For example the user who assigned a task would typically delete it when it is completed To delete a task follow these steps 1 Access the View Task screen for the task as described in Viewing a Task on page 224 2 Click the Delete button 1 3 A confirmation message appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 233 Managing Tasks 4 Click OK Viewing a Task s History Ektron CMS300 maintains a history of all events in the life of a task as well as any comments entered As examples the task history shows when and by whom the task was created when it changed to Active when it was linked to a content block when its state changed when it was approved etc You can view the task s history until the task is purged To view a task s history follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Task screen as explained in Viewing a Task on page 224 Click the History button H The history of task events appears example below view Task History for review today Date 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004 16 Sep 2004
233. lains how to work with Library files through the following subtopics e Copying Files to the Library on page 120 e Viewing Files on page 123 e Editing a File on page 125 e Overwriting Files on page 126 e Library Link Searching on page 129 e Deleting Library Items on page 129 e Adding a Library File to Content on page 130 For a definition of the term files see Terms Used in this Chapter on page 115 Copying Files to the Library Files must be copied to the Ektron CMS300 library before users can insert them into content To copy a file to the library follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 120 Library Folder 1 In the Workarea browse the library folder and select a sub folder to which you want to copy a file NOTE When you copy a file to a folder only users with permissions to it can insert the file into their content blocks Library Folder Content O 192 168 0 171 CME 36 Library Title aE Forms He Human Resour a 2 Marketing as Products hyperlinks Support images aE Syndication quicklinks 2 Several sub folders appear in the right frame Click the files folder Library Folder Content 5 192 168 0 171 cms FA ET E ee Ea Bom F Ba D a Dla Eo Bn D Da D N De E le Bn E Ae F e Dom D e E a Do D Da Ee Don F Da F Aa en D Aa D Da em D Da F D Ben D Ga F la Dom F Ba D la Don E Ga D e Doe F a F a Do D Aa E Ge De E Da
234. lbar Buttons Equivalent For more Keystroke information see Internet Explorer only Align paragraph so that it is arranged e evenly on the left side uneven on the right in the center of each line evenly on the right side uneven on the e evenly on right and left side a Display a dialog box that shows your version About of eWebEditPro XML and your license eWebEditPro XML k eys Bi Rem Sty Remove all style information applied to i ia selected text You apply styles using the Style dropdown list For example Before lt P Class note gt This is initial content lt P gt After lt P gt This is initial content lt P gt Style 4pply Style Display a list of styles Users can select from the list to apply a style to selected text Note that the list can change depending on the formatting of the selected line Your Webmaster determines which styles are available Change the heading size Your Webmaster determines which heading sizes are available Heading Size Mormal Change the font style Your Webmaster determines which fonts are available Times New Roman E Font Style Note If more than one font appears in a selection the browser on the reader s PC tries to display text using the first font If the browser cannot find that font it tries to use the second etc Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 281 Toolbar Buttons Equivalent For more
235. lders Tasks See Managing Tasks on page 213 Content Reports see Content Workflow Reports on page 101 e The bottom left frame displays the top level folders in Ektron CMS300 Your display may be different depending on whether you are an administrator Content folder see Working with Folders and Content Blocks on page 26 Forms folder see the Ektron CMS300 Administrator Manual chapter Special Features section Working with HTML Forms Library Folder on page 115 Modules see Working with Collections on page 138 Working with Menus on page 157 Working with Calendars on page 190 and Private Content amp Memberships section of the Managing Users amp User Groups chapter of the Ektron CMS300 Adminisirtor manual Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 16 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Settings folder which includes Updating Your User Profile on page 262 and Accessing Online Help on page 267 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop Ektron CMS300 s top level folders appear in the lower left corner of the Smart Desktop Use them to access all other folders To open any top level folder click it When you do it appears in the frame above Typically you would a click top level folder to see its sub folders then click a sub folder to see its content blocks The following graphic illustrates the location of Ektron CMS300 s major featur
236. le s background color A background image for the cell Apply the table border color to this cell border Apply a color other than the table border color to this cell border Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 For more information see Word Wrap on page 406 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 401 Setting Vertical Alignment on page 403 Specifying a Cell s Background Color on page 395 Specifying a Background Image for a Cell on page 397 Setting a Cell s Border Color on page 394 374 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Table Context Sensitive Menu The following menu appears when you right click the mouse while the cursor is in a table ont Eopy Paste Select All Insert Ao Insert Column Delete Rows Delete Columns Hege telle Split Cell Table Properties Cell Properties Hyperlink Picture Clean HTML Code Insert HTML All items on this menu are described in The Context Sensitive Menu on page 299 except Tables which is described in The Insert Table Menu on page 369 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 375 Manipulating Your Table s Format This section explains how to manipulate your table s format by specifying a number of rows and columns a width horizontal alignment a background color or image border color and size NOTE You can also apply most of these propert
237. le with all browsers aoe Position Lets you move selected table or image anywhere on the screen Locks selected table or image at its current screen position Nothing can move a locked object To move the object unlock it by clicking this button again a Lock If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image in front of Th Move to Front the others If two or more images overlay each other moves the selected image behind the others If text overlays an image move the image in front of the text If anim rl move the text in front of the image Below Text an image overlays text V g Text Direction Options Ta Move to Back The text direction menu options As ila allow bi directional editing of text which is useful for Arabic Farsi and Hebrew The client computer must also support the language The text buttons determine the editing direction while the edit buttons determine the side of the editor that displays the scroll bar For right to left languages such as Arabic Farsi and Hebrew the text editing would be right to left and the scroll bar would be on the left side Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 283 Toolbar Buttons For western European languages the text editing would be left to right and the scroll bar would be on the right side Te Te A The vertical scroll bar appears on the Leit Right Edit right side of the window
238. left corner to identify the picture to you and all users connected to the same Web server Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 320 Inserting Images NOTE The title is also the ait text for the image The alt text appears in place of the image on the Web page if the image itself cannot display for any reason 5 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 6 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box 7 Click OK The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the picture s properties For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 322 e Setting a Border on page 324 e Aligning the Picture on page 325 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 327 e Editing the Picture s Title on page 328 9 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor Using the Second Media Selection Dialog Box When using the second Media Selection dialog box you can insert a picture from any folder available to your computer whether the folder is on your computer or a remote computer or from the Web server Your Webmaster determines which pictures are available on the Web server To insert a picture from e a folder available to your computer click Select New File navigate to the file of interest and click OK e the Web server click the Select S
239. leting a Picture from the Server To delete a picture from the server select the picture and click the Delete button Inserting a Picture from Your Computer Use the lower left corner of the dialog box to insert pictures from your computer and any network folder available to your computer into the editor Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 319 Inserting Images To Select a Local File Browse Enter a description for the file e NOTE You can only select files in the To Select a Local File field if your computer has permission to upload files to the server To insert a picture from your computer follow these steps Click the Browse button 2 Navigate to the file that you want to insert and press Open to insert it Your Webmaster can set a maximum size in kilobytes for images If you select an image that exceeds the maximum an error message appears and you cannot insert it Your Webmaster can also restrict the type of image file you can insert For example if your Webmaster does not authorize you to insert bitmap bmp files and you try to do so an error message lists valid file extensions and you cannot insert the image AN You have not selected a file with one of the valid extensions gihjpg png ped iit 3 Click in the Enter a description for the file field Enter a title to describe the file 4 After you insert the picture the title appears in the dialog box s top
240. link Menu Item on page 178 Hyperlink Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 Viewing a Menu Just like editing an existing menu you can view a menu via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page When viewing a menu via the content or menu folder you get an internal view of information entered by menu creator When viewing via a navigation link on a Web page you get an external view of the menu as seen by anyone navigating Web site Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 179 Working with Menus View a Menu via its Content Folder To access a menu via its content folder follow these steps 1 Access the Workarea and navigate to the content folder that contains the menu Click the View Menu button 3 The View All Menus screen displays a list of menus under that folder 2 x View All Menus Content r Content ae Human Fesources 20 Marketing Title 1D Date Modified He News Sample menu 6 O2 Sep 2004 03 15 PM He Products s Support A Syndication 4 Click the menu you want to view 5 Click More Info to view the details about the menu Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 180 Working with Menus View Menu test menu Tithe W RedStar Airplane smaller version B Servo Control Engineer 124 B Plastic Molder 123 yahoo lore Info Title test menu ID 6 Path Y Last User To Edit Application Administrator Last
241. lished version of content to staged version Published Displays currently published version Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 92 Comparing Versions of a Content Block Displays the staged version of content See Also Staged Content on page 449 To switch between views click the corresponding View tab First Use of the View Content Difference Feature The first time the View Content Difference screen is used on a client machine a simple installation program is performed Click YES when the following screen appears Security Warning Do you want to install and run Ekron evebDift signed on 1 9 2004 2 40 PM and distributed by Ektron lnc Publisher authenticity verified by VenSign Class 3 Code Signing 2001 CA Caution Ektron Inc asserts that this content is safe You should only installview this content if you trust Ektron Ine to make that assertion J More Info When the installation program completes close and reopen the View Content Difference feature Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 93 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks Past versions of published content blocks are available unless your system administrator has purged them Your ability to view a content block s history is determined by your user privileges NOTE This section explains how to view and possibly restore older versions o
242. lly copied to library Search Data If your system administrator set up any search data definitions they appear accompanied by any values assigned to them when they were added to the library Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 124 Library Folder 5 To view the file click the Preview link at the bottom of the screen 6 The application used to open the selected file type displays the file NOTE You may need to download some files before you can be view them for example mdb mp3 Zip etc The following table describes the buttons on the View Library Item screen Edit the title of the library item Editing a File on page 125 Overwrite the library item Overwriting Files on page 126 Find content blocks linked to this library Library Link Searching on page 129 item Delete Library item Deleting Library Items on page 129 Editing a File You can edit the title and search data of any file that was copied to the library To do so follow these steps 1 Access the View File screen as described in Viewing Files on page 123 2 Click the Edit button L The Edit File screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 125 Library Folder Edit Library Item in Folder Contenti files Title ID Filename Jano documentation 49 femss00sample uploadedFiles 400 doc Search Data Not Included Included gt gt a Wawa Keyword Categ
243. matting 282 replacing 304 searching 304 selecting 276 WeblImageFX command 358 thumbnail WeblmageFX command 360 title bar displaying button text 265 toolbars buttons 28 277 collections 143 customizing 291 floating 3 buttons 4 redisplay 295 restore 295 trademark character inserting 282 twain acquire WeblmageFX comm and 361 twain source WeblmageFX comm and 361 U underline toolbar option 282 undo toolbar option 279 WebImageFX command 362 upload file path 118 image path 118 uppercase words spell checking 311 URL link field on Add Edit Menu screen 162 user email address editing 264 language editing 264 users profile customizing work page height 265 customizing work page size 264 customizing work page width 265 landing page after login 265 see profile set Smart Desktop as start location 266 V version number viewing 281 vertical flip WeblmageFX command 362 View Content Awaiting Approval 105 view content difference 87 button floating toolbar 4 screen first use 93 view date toolbar button 31 view difference toolbar button 31 view history button floating toolbar 5 toolbar button 31 view published toolbar button 31 view staged toolbar button 31 viewing HTML 419 W WebImageFX assigning new name to image 333 choosing image 331 commands blur 337 brightness 338 choose color 339 choose font 340 contrast 342 copy 343 create new 343 crop 344 delete 344 dimensions 345 exit 346 exit with
244. mber or a range of part numbers using the field on your Web site s search screen illustrated below gt ra f all the words any of the words C Exact Phrase C Match Partial Words City of origin Any Editor s name Any aii 65000 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 70 Adding or Editing Search Data NOTE When your system administrator sets up search data he determines whether or not is it publicly viewable If it is the search field appears on the search screen that site visitors use along with the search screen in the Ektron CMS300 Workarea If the data is not publicly viewable it only appears on the Workarea search screen Entering Tithe and Keywords After you create or update a content block it is typically published to the World Wide Web WWW Programs that search the Web such as Google look at a page s title and keywords to determine if they should return your Web page with their results To improve search results Ektron CMS300 provides two fields within Search Data e Title appears on the search results screen to further define your Web page File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ae Q Back J X iz Cay A Search r Favorites f Meda C a W 0 amp OH SD Address http 127 0 0 1 cms3 0RCsample index asp7id 18 Links RG internationali Pigs e When you Cr ilews 47 4 can add metac lt htm1 gt lt head gt appear on the
245. ministrator can set up your system to have borders always appear on a page In that case the toolbar always appears in the content block you don t need to click the mouse to make it appear For information on the classic user interface see The Administrators Manual gt Introduction to Ektron CMS300 gt Getting Started gt Recognizing Content Blocks gt The Floating Toolbar gt Returning to the Classic User Interface nis 15 private content On Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 3 Introduction to Ektron CMS300 On the horizontal toolbar you must move the cursor over the button to see its tooltip text Toolbar buttons let you act on the displayed content and display important information about it The toolbar buttons change depending on the content block s status or your permissions for the content block For example one toolbar button lets you edit the content block while another lets you view previous versions of it If granted permission by your administrator you can create new content blocks and edit or delete existing ones Most of your work with Ektron CMS300 involves working with content blocks Buttons on the Menu The following table describes each button that may appear Name Description More Information Approve Approve or decline a request to Approving Declining publish or delete a content block Content Blocks on page 76 Assign Task Assign a task to
246. mis a quicklink to an HTML form content block Whenever a content block is created a form link is automatically created for it Accessing The Library 1 To access the library click the Workarea button or icon Workarea 2 Click the Library folder in the lower left corner of the Workarea 3 The Library folder appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 116 Library Folder Library Folder Content TE O 192 168 0171 CME 26 Library itle HHE Forms a 7 Human Resour s Marketing a forms Products I hyperlinks Support J images 3 Syndication E guicklinks Also a properties toolbar button lets you view any folder s properties See Also Library Folder Properties on page 117 And a search button lets you look for library items See Also Searching the Library on page 119 Library Folder Properties To view a library folder s properties follow these steps 1 Click the Properties button E 2 The Library Management screen appears From here you can view all options for a folder Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 117 Library Folder Library Management Image Extensions qif Jpeg Jea bmp png Image Upload Path This path is relative to the site CMS300Samople UploadediImages Physical Path CINetoub way wrootCelss00Sample uploadediImages Verified File Extensions pot pdf sls doc File Upload Path This pa
247. n The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperlink Information Type http l Cancel Link intep 7 Bookmark Test Target Frame Quick Link 3 Click in the Link field after nttp 7 Then enter the address of the destination Web page For example to enter a hyperlink to the ektron Web site enter www ektron com 4 lf desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 411 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 5 Click OK Testing a Hyperlink Within the eWebEditPro XML editor you can test a hyperlink To do this select the hyperlink then double click it That action launches the Web page assigned to the hyperlink Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 416 Using Hyperlinks Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page sometimes the destination Web page contains bookmarks and you want to jump from your page to a bookmark on another page Bookmarks are described in Using Bookmarks on page 409 To create a hyperlink that jumps to another page s bookmark follow these steps Go to the destination Web page 2 Click the bookmark that you want to jump to For example on the illustration below the text Benefits to Partners jumps to a bookmark further down on the page PARTNER PROGRAM O
248. n spot within the current page page 413 Edit Source Edit your page s HTML source Editing a Section of a Page on page 420 Insert Source Insert HTML source onto the page at the Inserting Source on cursor location page 420 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 300 The Context Sensitive Menu Menu Option Lets you For more information see Check Spelling Compare words in the editor to Microsoft Checking Spelling on WORD spelling list page 308 View as WYSIWYG HTML View and edit your page s HTML Viewing and Editing HTML on page 419 Picture Insert a picture Inserting Images on page 316 These options only appear if Work with XML tags Editing XML Web Pages your site is using on page 429 only available eWebEditPro XML in the eWebEditPro XML User Guide Insert Custom tag tag name tag Attributes tag name tag Properties Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 301 Using eWebEditPro XML s Advanced Features Most of eWebEditPro XML s features are easy to learn For example to make your text bold you select the text and click the bold button However some of eWebEditPro XML s features are more complex For example when creating a table you must make several decisions the number of rows and columns the size of the border the spacing between cells etc The following sections explain eWebEditPro XML s more advanced features Ektro
249. n the approval chain but continues to receive emails notifying him of changes in the content block s status First Approver After Sports Writer submits the content block the first user in the approval chain Sports Editor receives an email stating that a content block needs his approval He can change and approve the content block or decline it Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 81 Approving Declining Content Blocks Sports Editor logs into Ektron CMS300 navigates to his desktop where he sees a link Content Awaiting Approval Egi f z iai R EY A 4 Smart Desktop for John Edit Content Awaiting Approval 2 5 L Content Currently Checked Out 2 Tasks 0 He clicks the link and sees all content blocks awaiting his approval The approvals folder window displays information such as title who submitted it go live date etc The Sports editor clicks the submitted content block view Content Awaiting Approval CREE Ane 6 Ae AAAA A Content Summary Search Data HOT NEW FEATURE Trinity In Line Pipe Trinitys new pipe and manifold are for rear exhaust engines and are now use In both the Sportster and the cheetah Both the manifold and pipe are made from high quality aluminum This new pipe is more durable and will withstan a bad crash The View Content Awaiting Approvals window appears listing all information necessary to decide whether to approve or decline the content block
250. n CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 302 Copying from Other Applications You can copy information from most other Windows applications into eWebEditPro XML and retain the formatting from the original application In general copying from another application involves these steps Sign on to the application in which the information resides Select the information to be copied Press lt Ctrl gt lt C gt Go to eWebEditPro XML Press lt Ctrl gt lt V gt to paste the selected information Note that you can only copy content not background information that generates content tS SY So for example you can copy the values in a spreadsheet but not the formulas used to generate those values Also copying dynamic fields from Microsoft WORD would retrieve the current value of the fields but not the variables that generate those values It s a good idea to experiment with copying from different sources to test the results Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 303 Finding and Replacing Text To find and optionally replace text on your Web page click the Replace button i When you do the Find and Replace dialog box appears Find And Replace now E O od Replace with o J Match whole word only Replace P Match case Replace All Direction Up Down Cancel You can use this dialog box to simply find text or to find text and replace it with other text Each option is explaine
251. n in the approval chain is indicated by red text on the Approvals line Start Date None Specified End Date None Specified Date Created 07 Jun 2004 10 37 AM Approval Method Force All 4pprovers Lpprovals EditorInchief SportseEditar XML Configuration None Specified HTML Content 4ssumedtinheritec Path Sports Content Searchable es Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 110 Content Workflow Reports Content Pending Start Date Report The Pending Start Date Report displays all content blocks that were approved but whose start dates haven t occurred Each content block on the report contains the following information Title Title of content block ID number assigned to content block by Ektron CMS300 Last Editor Last user to edit the content block Start Date Date and time content block will go live on Web site Path Folder location of content block in Ektron CMS300 Web site Editing Content with a Pending Start Date You may edit a content block on the Pending Start Date Content report To do so follow these steps Click the content block you want to view The View Content page is displayed Using the toolbar at the top of the page perform any action available Refresh Reminder Report The Refresh Report displays all content blocks whose end date has passed and whose archive option is set to Refresh Report These content blocks are still visible on the Web site Their app
252. n on the login screen Logging Out of the Sample Site To log out of Ektron CMS300 follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 11 Logging In and Out 1 Click the Logout button in a content block s floating toolbar or click the Logout button Er on the Web page 2 The Logout confirmation box appears j Ektron CMS Logout Microsott m EA 3 Click the Logout button 4 You return to the Web page from which you logged out However it is in standard view not Ektron CMS300 view Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 12 The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea and Smart Desktop The Workarea is a central screen from which you can perform all activities within Ektron CMS300 From it you can access the Smart Desktop view the system s top level folders navigate through the folder structure perform actions on content blocks This chapter describes using the Workarea and Smart Desktop through the following subtopics Accessing the Workarea on page 13 Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 14 Navigating Within the Smart Desktop on page 17 Sending Instant Email on page 22 Accessing the Workarea To access your Workarea follow these steps 1 Click the Workarea button at the bottom of the screen Workarea or the Workarea button in a content block s floating toolbar The Workarea appears The following illu
253. nd Content Blocks W Content M Forms M Assets M Include Archived Search JAlWords amp Words Tithe Any Comments Any Date Created Any Date Modified Any Apply to CMS and DMS Last Editor s Last Name Any Summary Any Status Any City of origin Any Editors name Any Top Stories Any Size of Document Any Apply to MS Office Number of Pages 3 files only powerPainty ay As you can see the top group of fields applies to all file types The next group is search data applied to any content in the selected folder For more information see Adding or Editing Search Data on page 68 The last group applies to Microsoft Office files only ae Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 51 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Fields that Apply to CMS Content and Assets Title In CMS the content block or form title In AMS the Title field in the file s Properties window Comments In CMS the content block or form s comments which can be inserted via the Comment tab In AMS comments are inserted in the file s Properties window s Summary tab Date Created The file s creation date Date Modified The late date when the file was modified Language Each file in CMS and AMS is assigned a language property when it is created or imported Note This field determines the language of the content being searched The language dropdown list shown below which ap
254. nd any other kind of file into Ektron CMS300 Non Office files are known as managed files Collectively these files are known as assets After being saved in the Ektron CMS300 asset files can be updated and tracked like HI ML content blocks If you re familiar with how content blocks are handled much of what you already know applies to assets For example assets can be stored in folders with content blocks or in separate folders that you create just for them are assigned content ID numbers capture summary search data comment and schedule information inherit permissions and approvals from their folder properties progress through a workflow check out check in publish provide a history and let you restore an earlier version can be searched including some Office document properties can have foreign language editions can have a task assigned to them appear on content reports update the Smart Desktop listing of files awaiting approval checked out tasks to expire Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 236 Using the Asset Management System When a file is imported to the CMS then saved a copy of it is saved to the asset management server From then on whenever a user edits and saves the file a new copy Is stored In this way you can review previous versions of any asset and restore a prior version if needed The rest of this chapter explains how to use the Asset Management System with Ektron CMS
255. ndar Event on page 199 View Calendar Events Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 Return to Previous Screen Return to previous screen Event title within Jump to calendar event s calendar sample Web page if available below f a RC International Announces the RC Adding a Calendar Event NoTE You can only add a calendar event if you have add or edit permission for the __ calendar s folder To add a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the calendar to which you want to add an event as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 197 NOTE You can also add a calendar event after viewing the View Events screen See Also Viewing a Calendar Event on page 208 2 Navigate to the month and day for which you want to add a calendar event Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 199 Working with Calendars Sunday Monday Tuesday JAA RC International Hosts RC Conference 3 Click the Add Event a button 4 The Add Calendar Event screen appears Nore Folder information appears at the bottom of the screen only if the folder has sub folders or content blocks under it Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 200 Working with Calendars i a Add Calendar Event Event Title Away game against Concord Event Location Powell Field One Time Recurring Date 4 Apr 2005 pa Start 2 00 PM End 4 30 PM W Display the times for the event
256. ne Pipe Publish None Specified Edit John E When you click a user group name or email icon the email screen appears as shown below Once you complete the screen and click Send an email is sent to designated users Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 22 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To jedit ektron com From jeditt ektron cam Subject Content Trinity In Line Fipe Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt A oy E 7 U TI GELALI John Edit URL bttpi192 166 0 17 CMe S005 armplefndex asp rid 22 ES Send Email Cancel The following sections explain how to set up and use Instant email e Conditions for Instant eMail on page 23 e Where Instant email is Available on page 24 e Modifying Instant eMail on page 24 Conditions for Instant eMail You must have a valid email address set up in the user profile If not email icons do not appear in Ektron CMS300 See Also Updating Your User Profile on page 262 e Your system administrator must enable the feature Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 23 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Where Instant email is Available Instant email is available from several screens that display users and user groups Typically you click a user name or the email icon to launch an email Screens in the following Ektron CMS300 features support instant email e Smart Desktop e Tasks e Approvals e Reports e User and user group setup W
257. neadbuvinnsdes 23 Where Instant email is Available cccccececcesseeceseeeeneeseneeseeeensess 24 Modifying Instant eMail sssisisrisisniinsssisissssrsrirosisssssruisesivesirrssssarsvinisss 24 Working with Folders and Content Blocks 00 26 Workarea Toolbar Buttons cccseceeeeeseneeenseeneeeneneneeeeeoaes 28 Viewing a Folder srcveintetinsedanvamaierviceacsssampeiisedsdovetoeasteusiiveniies 31 Viewing a Content BIOCK ccccccesseeesesseeceneeseesseesenseesenseeseens 33 Be EESE EE EAA E TEES AA EEEE E EAT ETT 36 Adding a Content BIOCK cccccesseeseenseeceseeseesseesenseesenseeseees 37 Editing a Content BlOCK sasssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn na 40 Translating a Content Block to Another Language ccssse0e 41 Expanding the Content Area cc ssccssseseessesseeseeseeseeseesesees 42 Deleting a Content BIOCK cccccesseeeeseseeseenseeeeeeeesenneeseenees 44 Search Content Folder nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nne 45 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 i The Noise PISS a ins cacecdvicwiincveddecweitinedaxigidaisdu EEEE ORA 48 Specifying Match Criteria ccccccccccssecccceeesesseeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeesaas 49 cee EAE EEE 50 Tips on Responding to Search Criteria Fields ccccseeeeeeeeees 53 Adding Sub Folders sssansnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn
258. ned By 2 Assigned By Me Prep to Move Downstairs Not Started Low 4 Mar 2005 jedit jedit Create Edit Greeting Content Block 24 Wot Started Normal 7 Mar 2005 jedit jedit z Assigned To User Review Task section Not Started High 11 Mar 2005 admin jedit Not Started e Active e Awaiting Data On Hold Reopened Completed From this page you can view sort update or add tasks To learn more about the View Tasks screen see Viewing a Task on page 224 To learn about sorting by Task Type see Sorting Tasks By Task Type on page 228 Creating the Task via the Task Folder See Also Task Module Toolbar on page 235 To create a task follow these steps 1 Access your Tasks folder as described in Accessing the Tasks Folder on page 214 2 Click the Add button E5 3 The Add Task screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 215 Managing Tasks 4 Enter information for the task using the following table Field Description Task Title Enter a title for the task for example Update Content The title appears in the left column of the View Tasks screen Assigned To Your user name appears e f you do not have Redirect permissions you cannot assign tasks to other users If you have Redirect permissions your user name appears followed by Select User or Group To assign the task to yourself proceed to the next field To assign the task to someone el
259. nformation about Ektron CMS300 templates Or you can disable the template and instead use quicklinks to determine the page template See Also Quicklinks and Forms on page 135 If you specify a template all content blocks in the collection use the same screen elements other than the specific content For example the page header footer and information in the right frame of the screen are all the same On the other hand if you use quicklinks every page in the collection uses its original template As a result the surrounding information may change for every content block in the collection Here is an example of links using quicklinks Notice that content uses several templates As a result when a user clicks a content block in the collection the screen information around the content block changes according to its template Title ID Home Page Content 1 Support Page 3 CMS300Sample index asp id 8 Plastic Molder 123 13 CMS300Sample hr asp id 13 RC Cheetah 5 CMS300Sample products asp id 5 RC Redstar 7 CMS300Sample products asp id 7 1 New Content Block CMS300Sample index asp id 17 Contact Ektron 15 CMS300Sample index asp 7id 15 Here is an example of links when using a template named index asp In this case all pages have the same information surrounding the content block Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 146 Working with Collections Title ID f URL Link Home Page Content 1 C
260. ngle separation sequence That is multiple whitespace characters are ignored Blank whitespace characters are treated as any other character Determines whether comparison is case sensitive For example if you check this box the strings Bob and BOB are not highlighted because their only difference is the case of the characters Determines whether comparison ignores changes in text formatting attributes HTML Visual Analysis only After updating setup information click OK to save changes Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 91 Comparing Versions of a Content Block Content Area The content area displays the content comparison cos Compare Microsoft Internet Explorer Welcome to RC international EC it ee is dedicated to the RO racing enthusiasts We eat work play and lve RC racing In three Re ational has become one of the leading manufactures of RO racing and flying vehicles Cur dedicatio sport and the enthusiasts who play it has endeared our products to the RC commuraty We will continue strivit improve our affordable products and hope you will become an RC internMational member The following table describes the change indicators Plain black text Trinitys new pipe and Unchanged Yellow highlighted text Our dedication tothe Added View Tabs When viewing content in the View Content Difference feature there are three view modes explained below Compares pub
261. nk Your Web masier can add to the Hyperlink dialog box any number of Quicklinks that is Web addresses that you can link to simply by selecting an item from a drop down menu Quick Link select link Ektron Technical Support Quicklinks are quick because you do not need to enter or know the url of the destination Web page your Web master has already stored that information for you To apply a Quicklink follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 414 Using Hyperlinks 1 Select the source text or image 2 Click the Hyperlink button 1B The Hyperlink dialog box appears Hyperlink Information Type http Link http 77 Bookmark Cancel Text Target Frame Quick Link select link 3 Click the down arrow to the right of the Quicklink field A list of Web pages that your Web master has pre loaded appears Click an item from the list to select it If desired you can use the Target Frame field to change the window in which the destination text appears For details see Changing the Destination Window on page 411 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 6 Click OK Entering a Hyperlink Manually To create a hyperlink follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 415 Using Hyperlinks 1 Select the source text or image 2 Click the New Hyperlink butto
262. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 54 Deleting FolderS ssanannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 55 Scheduling Content to Begin and End 2 e00 57 Setting a Start Date wanes cane eniereeienseareeeeiens 57 Setting an End Date on a Content BIOCK ccccsseeeeeeeeeeees 60 Setting Archive OptiOns cccccccsssesssseseeseseeseecenseseeseseneeesees 61 Adding a Content Block Summary 2 ceeeeeeeeeeeees 64 Creating as TU AN Sos perpen vexatseneroortanirencueniapyendppiaincetienrernedeaneces 65 Eding a SUMMANY aererereenee arnt ert cnet een rne ss rrerretpystnene seen lta rlanenrt ivr rn 66 Adding or Editing Search Data cccccssseseeseeeeeeeeees 68 Entering Custom Search Data cccsssecsssesesseeceeeeeeneeseeneees 69 Entering Title and Keywords ccsssessseeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeneees 71 Entering or Editing Search Data ccsccccssseseeseeeeeeeeeeseneeneees 72 Approving Declining Content BIOCKS 2 00see0 76 Approve Decline One Content BIOCK ccccccsssseeeeeseeeeeneeeeees 77 Approve Decline Several Content BIOCKS sseeeeeee 79 Example of an Approval Chai ccccsssessesecseseeseeseeeesenseneees 79 Creating a Content BIOGK jcssxctacctecsssesaced deaehesntndsipeamensdedeackenpedestaonened 80 PEU OTE T tacts ates rc tetas rs aepennentindechosesnacsumounvennany atoonneiueraractacines 81 Second
263. nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nne 139 Finding a Collection Using the Collections Folder c008 141 Viewing a Collection sccccseseeeseseeesesseecesseecensseeeeneeenenseees 142 Creating a Collection cccccssseeceeseeeseeseeceenseseenseeeenseesenees 144 Adding a ColectiOM cissie nininini mesini 144 Assigning Content Blocks to the Collection ccccccceeseeeeeeees 147 Editing Content Blocks in a Collection sscecceeeeeseeeees 150 Reordering Collections LiSt ccscessssseeesseeseeneeseenseeseens 151 Editing Collection Information cccccsseeeseeseeseeneesseeseeees 152 Deleting a Collection c cscsccssesseeeeseeseenseeseesseseeeseeseeneeseens 152 Working with Collections in a Multi Language System 153 Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Exists 154 Creating a Language Specific Collection if Another Edition Does Not FMI E nice neta E EEE E E E EEE LOE E OE ATT 154 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 iii Comparison of Collections Menus and the List Summary Fea 0 ene nce ee ee me a 155 Working with Menus ccsceseeneeescessensensenseensenseness 157 The Structure of Menus and Menu Items 2 00008 158 Access to the Menus Feature ccssscssssssseessseenseeenseneneeeas 159 Managing MenUuS sssnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnne 160 POI a
264. ntent block 11 The Event Title and Hyperlink fields are populated with information from the selected content block Add Calendar Event Event Title lest Event Location One Time Recurring Date 3 May 2004 pa Start Time 12 00 AM End Time 12 00 AM W Display the times for the event Hyperlink CMS300Sample news asp id 28 if Make the Hyperlink active Launch link in a new browser Root Folder News Folder Path earketing Wews Ea 12 Make changes to the fields using the table in Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 13 Click the Save button g Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 207 Working with Calendars Viewing a Calendar Event April JEE 10 Ea E 17 Ea E 24 Ed E 31 Ea E Once events are added to a calendar you can easily view them To view a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the Show Calendar screen for the calendar that contains the event you want to view as described in Viewing a Calendar on page 197 2 Place the cursor on the event you want to view May 2004 June 4 Ea E 5 Ea a Ea E ERIEN weekly meeting Location Hew York Room Start 12 00 4M End 1 00 PM 1E 12 Bal E 13 Eel E 14 E E weekly meeting Location Mew York Room Star 12 00 4M nd 1 PM 19 Ea E a1 EJS weekly meeting Location Mew York Foor Star 12 00 4M End 1 00 PM 25 Bal E 2g Bal E weekly meeting Location Hew York Room
265. ntent for approval e Publish a content block to the Web site e Access the Library Make the necessary edits to the content block For a description of the fields on the screen see Responding to the Fields on the Add Content Screen on page 38 Choose a toolbar option or tab from the top of the Edit Content window These options are described in Options on the Add Content Screen on page 39 Translating a Content Block to Another Language Use this procedure when you want to initialize a new foreign language content block with content from a source language This copying should facilitate the translation Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 41 Working with Folders and Content Blocks For example an editor is translating content from French to German The editor copies the French edition to a new content block whose language is German As the editor translates the French edition into German he deletes the French content Any images in the content would usually remain and all formatting tables bullets etc is retained To copy a content block into a new content block of a different language follow these steps 1 oe amp y Go to the View Content screen for the content block you want to translate From the View drop down list select a original language Click the content block that you want to translate It appears on the View Content screen Use the Add drop down list in the upper right corner t
266. o Edit Last user that made changes to the quicklink or form Last Edit Date The date the quicklink or form was last edited Date Created The date and time the quicklink or form was originally added to the Ektron CMS300 library To preview a quicklink or form click the link at the bottom of the page Updating Default Template for Multiple Quicklinks NOTE This action can only be performed on quicklinks When a content block is moved in Ektron CMS300 its quicklink does not get changed However the quicklink does get moved to Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 136 Library Folder the proper library folder Once it is moved you can update the default template called in the content block s quicklink To update the default template for one or many quicklinks follow these steps 1 inthe Library access the quicklinks folder containing quicklinks you want to update 2 Click the Update Quicklinks button 3 The Update URL Link Template Quicklinks screen is displayed 4 Check the quicklinks you want to update NOTE Check the box in the table header to select or deselect all 5 Inthe To text field enter the name of the template you want to apply to the selected quicklinks 6 Click the Update Quicklinks button to update the changes A confirmation message is displayed 7 Click OK to continue The selected quicklinks are updated to use the template specified Ektron CMS300 User Manua
267. o select the language into which you want to translate the content Danish Lerman otandarc The original language content appears Translate into the new language then delete the original content When you save the content block it is saved as the edition of that content block in the selected language Expanding the Content Area While working with content in Ektron CMS300 it is possible to expand the content area of the screen vertically This gives you more space to work on content You can expand the content Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 42 Working with Folders and Content Blocks portion of the Workarea by clicking the up arrow ai The arrow s screen location is shown below Edit Content bo ba Title Contact Ektron O English US Content amp Apply Style Heading4 TimesNewRoman 3 12 pt A BIUA SS BRARRAA SOY nays AeA Ay mM A 2 nbsp TM E B gt a amp E e LE Bl III HEHE an Tha Ml t gi Contact Ektron Ektron encourages you to contact us with your questions and feedback shoot Ebtran e Woh enantant siithoringn and mananamant colitin ec Once the content area is expanded the tooltips bar and toolbar are not visible ES Appl Style Normal Verdana 2 10pt Ach BIUA XOBRRRAA SOM ony AANA AVN Ar h nbsp TM i 7 H gt ERG i z EE ESSEE Contact Ektron Ektron encourages you to contact us
268. o your table click the Cell Padding field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Border Color TEHE Border Size z Cell Padding z Cell Spacing z Assigning Cell Spacing To assign cell spacing to your table click the Cell Spacing field on the Insert Table dialog box Enter the number of pixels Border Color Border Size Cell Padding Cell Spacing z Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 408 Using Bookmarks Use a bookmark to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another place in a file On your Web page text appears in a different color to indicate that additional information is available at the bookmark s location For example if your Web page includes meeting minutes the top of the page could list the meeting dates You could then assign a hyperlink to each date and a bookmark to each set of minutes The user sees that a date Is in a different color so clicks the date to jump to the bookmark that marks the location of the meeting minutes Creating a Bookmark on page 409 describes how to set up a hyperlink to a bookmark within a file You can also set up hyperlink to e another Web page This procedure is described in Using Hyperlinks on page 413 e a bookmark within another Web page This procedure is described in Creating a Hyperlink to a Location Within a Web Page on page 417 This section explains e Creating
269. on page 164 If adding a content block you can only insert one in the selected language 10 Later you can add more menu items edit them delete them view them etc These capabilities are described in this chapter By Accessing the Menus Report Screen From the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus Click the menu you want to translate Follow the instructions from Step 3 in By Navigating the Site on page 188 Creating a Menu in Any Language To create a menu in any language follow these steps Form the Workarea screen click Modules gt Menus 2 From the language drop down list select the new menu s language ID Description 3 Create the menu See Adding a New Menu on page 160 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 189 Working with Calendars Working with Calendars Calendars in Ektron CMS300 perform the same function as a paper calendar they keep one or more users informed about upcoming events They can be displayed to all visitors to your Web site and any authorized user can add events to a calendar Typical calendar events could include e company meeting e reserving a conference room for an interview e company holidays e deadlines These are only a few uses of calendar events Calendars are versatile and can easily meet all of your needs A sample calendar appears below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 190 Working with Calendars Sunda
270. on 7 186 Working with Menus The Delete Menu Item screen opens 6 Click the check box next to the menu item you want to delete You can click Select All to choose all menu items Click Clear All to unselect all menu items 7 Click the Delete button 1 Removing a Menu Item via Menus Module You can delete any menu item by clicking the accompanying Delete icon amp on the View menu screen Alternatively you can follow these steps The procedure below is quicker if you are deleting several or all items at once 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 183 2 Click the Remove button The Delete Menu Item screen opens Click the checkbox next to the menu item you want to delete You can click Select All to choose all menu items delete Click Clear All to unselect all menu items 5 Click the Delete button 7 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System NOTE For background information about supporting multiple languages on your Web site see the Ektron CMS300 Administrator manual section Multi Language Support gt Working with Multi Language Content You can create an edition of any menu in every supported language When a site visitor selects a language navigates to a page that has a menu and clicks the menu link Ektron CMS300 displays the menu in the selected language if it is available If a menu in that language is not available nothing a
271. on CMS300 Web site and access the Workarea 2 Access the Smart Desktop see Accessing the Workarea on page 13 Click the Reports folder 3 A list of available reports appears mart Desktop Tasks Reports Approvals Checked In Content Rep Checked Out Content Re New Content Report Submitted Content Repo Content Pending Start O Refresh Reminder Expired Content Report Content To Expire oo 0o00 0000 6 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 101 Content Workflow Reports NOTE The Approvals and Checked Out Reports are also available from the Workarea The reports are described below Report Displays content blocks in For more information see this status Approvals Requiring your approval Approvals Reports on page 105 Checked In Content Checked in Checked In Report on page 107 Checked Out Content Checked out Checked Out Report on page 108 New Content New that is created and saved New Content Report on page 109 but never published Submitted Content Submitted for publication Submitted Report on page 109 Pending Content Approved and pending a start date Content Pending Start Date Report on page 111 Refresh Reminder Report End date has been reached Refresh Reminder Report on page 111 Expired Content Expired date has been reached Expired Content Report on page 112 Content to Expire Will expire within specified number Content to Expire Report
272. on page 64 Search Edit Search Enter or edit this content block s search data Data Data ee Note All required search data needs to be added before the content block can be submitted into the approval chain See Also Adding or Editing Search Data on page 68 Comment Add Comment Briefly describe the content or comment on changes made when editing a content block The history comment appears on the View Content and Content History screens Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 39 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Button or Tab Description Add Start and End dates If you do not want to submit the content block to the approval chain immediately enter when it will be submitted See Also Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 57 If appropriate enter a date when the content will no longer be viewable on the Web site See Also Setting an End Date on a Content Block on page 60 Submit Submit the content block into the approval chain This action also returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor See Also Approving Declining Content Blocks on page 76 Publish Publish the content to the Web site Note Only the last approver in the approval chain sees this button See Also Approving Declining Content Blocks on page 76 This action also returns the changed content to the database and exits the editor Check In Save and check in the
273. ons on page 138 Fey Menus View and work with menus assigned Working with Menus to this content block on page 157 cy Search Look for content in the folder Search Content Folder on page 45 e View View the folder s properties Properties on Properties page 36 Viewing a Content Block You can view all content blocks in your Ektron CMS300 Web site Viewing content blocks allows you to view the content search data summaries and other information To view a content block in Ektron CMS300 follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 33 Working with Folders and Content Blocks 1 Navigate to the folder that contains the content block as explained in Viewing a Folder on page 31 2 If your system supports more than one language you can select an edition of the content block in a particular language via the language dropdown list illustrated below Trinity In Line Pipe 1 manifold are for rear exhaust engines and 3 Click a content block 4 The view content screen appears View Content Contact Ektron PO bts ies ee E he OD view English US add select language Content Summary Search Data Content Contact Ektron Ektron encourages you to contact us with your questions and feedback about Ektron s Web content authoring and management solutions After you enter the content you have the following options Your options ma
274. ontent block can be submitted into the approval chain e Your system administrator may prevent you from editing a field In this case the field has a gray background and you cannot place the cursor there e Fields may appear in two columns In this case the system administrator provides a list of terms that you can apply to the content block You can only select terms from the list you cannot enter free text One column is labeled Not Included and the other Included Move terms between lists by clicking the arrow gt gt and lt lt Or move all terms between lists by clicking All gt gt Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 74 Adding or Editing Search Data e Inthe Keywords field you may see a semi colon as a separator character Use the separator character to separate items in a field e lf default search data was defined for a specific data type you can click the Default button at the bottom of each field to restore it e Below each field is a Characters Left field which counts the number of search data characters You cannot exceed the maximum 500 characters when entering search data information 5 Click the Save button 1 6 The View Content screen reappears The content block is now in a checked out state to you For the changes to take effect on the Web site check in the content and submit it into the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content Blocks on page 7
275. ontent Searchable on page 39 12 If desired add a summary search data a schedule and comments See Also e Adding a Content Block Summary on page 64 e Adding or Editing Search Data on page 68 e Scheduling Content to Begin and End on page 57 13 Click the appropriate button to either check in Ei or publish Ee the file See Also Adding a Content Block on page 37 and Save Check in and Publish on page 243 14 A window appears momentarily indicating that the file is being uploaded to the AMS server Importing Several Managed Files To import several managed files into AMS follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 254 Using the Asset Management System See Also Importing Files Individually vs Several at Once on page 249 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the files NOTE To learn about working with folders see Working with Folders and Content Blocks on page 26 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view the asset types you can add View Contents of Folder Content Managed Files All Types HTML Content Office Documents 1033 28 Select Managed Files The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the managed files under a different language open the dropdown list and select the language French standard Mar 2005 03 29
276. or deletion content 448 menus accessing 159 add new content block via naviga tion link 171 adding new via content folder 161 via Menus module 163 adding to toolbar 292 appearance to content contributor 157 to site visitor 157 changing orientation 298 compared with collection and List Summary 155 creating 296 in any language 189 definition 157 deleting 185 editing 172 via content folder 172 via menus module 172 via navigation link 173 icons 3 items adding content block as 167 adding external hyperlink as 169 adding library asset as 168 adding submenu 169 adding to submenu 170 adding via content folder 164 adding via modules folder 165 adding via navigation link on Web page 166 definition 158 deleting via content folder 186 via menus module 187 editing Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 content block 176 external hyperlink 178 library asset 178 submenu items 179 via content folder 174 via menus module 175 via navigation link 175 rearranging 184 moving from toolbar 297 multi language issues 187 rearranging on toolbar 295 removing from toolbar 292 structure 158 submenu definition 159 template link field 163 translating 188 URL link field 162 viewing via content folder 180 via menus module 183 via navigation link 183 merging cells 405 Microsoft Word editing in 313 editing XML documents 314 uploading image from 314 multi language menus 187 N number toolbar option 280 numbers in words sp
277. orIn Chief Comment EditorInChief logs in to Ektron CMS300 and accesses his Workarea The Workarea has an Approval folder with the content awaiting his approval EditorInChief navigates through the Approval folder until he finds the content block Red Sox win World Series From this window EditorInChief can view information about the content block including title go live date user who created it etc He then clicks the content he wants to approve Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 84 Approving Declining Content Blocks View Content Awaiting Approval Search Data Comment Content Title Fed Sox win World Series Content ID a2 Status Submitted for 4oprovalisi Submitted by Sports Writer Last Edit Date 07 Jun 2004 10 37 AM Start Date None Specified End Date None Specified Date Created 07 Jun 2004 10 37 AM Approvals EditoriInchief SportsEditor History Comment Metadata Title Keywords ummary This window is similar to the previous approver s but includes a Publish button at the top of the screen The EditorlnChief has a publish button instead of a submit button because he is the last approver in the approval chain When he approves the content block it is published to the Web site Like the Sports editor the EditorInChief has the following options Ce ee Sends the content to the next approver in the iz Approve approval chain E 1 Sends an email
278. ords with numbers 311 fix errors 309 splitting a cell 404 staged content block viewing 31 start date content block setting 57 setting results 59 style class assigning to text 281 sub folders adding 54 submenus adding as menu item 169 adding items 170 definition 159 deleting 186 submit toolbar button 30 submitted content definition 446 summary adding 64 content creating for existing content block 66 creating for new content block 65 editing 66 T tables alignment 382 background color applying 384 deleting 385 background image deleting 387 inserting 386 border color 387 invisible 388 size 389 columns adding 377 deleting 377 spanning 399 specifying 376 creating 366 deleting 367 inserting within a table 367 locking in position 283 rows adding 377 deleting 377 spanning 399 specifying 376 section 508 425 width setting by percentage 379 setting by pixels 381 tasks add button 28 assign button floating toolbar 4 assigning to content block 216 to user 216 comments adding 230 updating 232 creating via content block 224 via task folder 215 definition 213 deleting 233 due date 217 editing 230 priority assigning 216 relationship to content blocks 213 start date 217 state assigning 217 toolbar buttons 235 viewing 224 options 225 sorting options 229 template link field on Add Edit Menu screen 163 text aligning 281 in columns 368 within a cell 401 direction menu 283 indenting 280 remove for
279. ormation see Create New Creates a new image Create New on page 343 Selects an image to edit Open on page 349 Save on page 355 i Save As Saves the current image under a Save As on page 356 different name or format Twain Acquire Performs a single page scan Twain Acquire on Before scanning you must select a page 361 source using the Twain Source command Twain Source Allows the user to select a source for Twain Source on acquiring an image such as a page 361 scanner or digital camera Exit Save changes and return to Exit on page 346 eWebEditPro XML Exit without save Ignore changes return to Exit without Save on eWebEditPro XML page 346 Thumbnail Creates a thumbnail of the current Thumbnail on image page 360 Note A thumbnail is a miniature display of an image Thumbnails allow fast browsing though images Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 334 Editing Images Edit Menu Options Toolbar Command Brief Description For more Button information see Copies a selected area of an image Copy on page 343 paste as new Inserts copied image or area into a Paste as New Image image new file on page 351 Reverses the most recent action Undo on page 362 mu redo Reapplies the changes from the Redo on page 353 command that occurred before you pressed Undo select Selects an area of an image You Select on page 357 can then p
280. ort News Careers Search Calendar Login Contact Ektron Click here to proceed to the demo site sML Content Show Calendar Contact Us Form Copyright 2003 Ektron Inc Sample Site Javascript Syndication Demo Login Help username adnan and password admin Quick tips Icons L Edit content block in I E NE le eek N EN ea S 4 Click the Login button 5 The login dialog box appears Ektron CMS Login Microsoft Is ed 6 Enter your username and password 7 Click the Login button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 9 Logging In and Out 8 The Web page appears You can navigate around your Web site as you could before signing in But now the content is surrounded by a colored box when you move the cursor over it illustrated below Rods ee HOT NEW FEATURE Trinity In Line Pipe Trinitys new pipe and manifold are for rear exhaust engines and are now used in both the Sportster and the cheetah Both the manifold and pipe are made from high quality aluminum This new pipe is more durable and will withstand a bad crash Site Preview While logged into Ektron CMS300 you can preview the Web site as it would appear to visitors or view it in regular view Button Description Appearance crow Preview Content blocks appear as last edited The advantage of this Mode mode is that you can see a Web page as it will appear to on your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with i
281. ory Mo Selection Featured V sell by date 55 Anr 2005 04 25 40 PM T Required fields 4 Change the title of the file As needed update the search data Your system administrator defines the search data in the Search Data Definitions screen 6 Click the Update button a Overwriting Files If a library file becomes out of date or the wrong version was copied you may replace it with a new version Overwriting files lets you minimize disk space and the number of library files NOTE The ability to overwrite a library file is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see an Overwrite button E on the View Library Item in Folder screen you do not have permission to overwrite NOTE You can only overwrite images and files Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 126 Library Folder Before You Overwrite an Image When overwriting an image the new image uses the same size dimensions and file extension as the older image Be sure that the two images have the same file extension and size or make the adjustments at each occurrence of the image Before You Overwrite a File Remember all links that point to the overwritten file now point to the new file Overwriting Library Assets To overwrite a library file follow these steps 1 Navigate to the View File screen for the file you want to overwrite as described in Viewing Files on page 123 Click the Overwrite button Th
282. otes on Working with Office Documents e lf you have an Excel spreadsheet open outside the AMS then you open one within it and navigate to another template page on your Web site then return to the spreadsheet outside the AMS a new open worksheet appears Close it e lf you are working with an Excel spreadsheet the File and Open toolbar buttons within Excel appear active that is not grayed out but are not operable Ea Microsoft Excel Eile Edit View Insert Format Tools Data Window e lf you access an Office document on a Web page you must close that instance of the browser before proceeding to another Web page If you do not close the browser and continue to add or edit assets the original document continues to use up your computer s resources Creating a New Office Document To create a new Office document follow these steps 1 From the Workarea select the Content folder 2 Select the folder in which you want to place the document Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 240 Using the Asset Management System NOTE To learn about working with folders see Working with Folders and Content Blocks on page 26 3 Click the down arrow next to the add dropdown list to view a list of items you can add View Contents of Folder Conten HTML Content Office Documents Managed Files 4 Select Office Documents 5 The default language appears in the View dropdown list To save the
283. our toolbar place the cursor on the menu name and click the mouse The check mark disappears and the menu no longer appears on the toolbar Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 292 Customizing Your Toolbar Removing or Adding Menu Items 1 Place the cursor on the toolbar 2 Right click the mouse 3 A dropdown list appears Click Customize NOTE If Customize does not appear on the menu you are not authorized to customize the toolbar 4 The Toolbar Customization dialog box appears Toolbar Customization View As Paragraph Format Format Special Characters C Form Elements Table Position Objects C Test Direction 5 Click the menu that you want to edit Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 293 Customizing Your Toolbar 6 Click the Commands tab A new screen appears Toolbar Customization All Commands sZ Bullets Bulleted List g Button gA Cell Properties imi Center Align Center Check Spelling aec Check Spelling As You Checkbox Selected Toolbar E dit Using the Customize Toolbar Dialog Box The left half of the Commands screen lists the buttons in the sequence in which they appear on the menu The right half of the screen lists available buttons that do not currently appear on the menu To add a button to the toolbar drag it from the right side of the screen to the location on the left side where you want it to appear You c
284. out save 346 freehand 347 horizontal flip 347 image info 348 line 348 open 349 oval 350 paste as new image 351 pointer selection 351 polygon 352 rectangle 353 redo 353 rotate 354 save 355 save as 356 select 357 sharpen 357 text 358 thumbnail 360 twain acquire 361 twain source 361 undo 362 vertical flip 362 zoom in 363 zoom out 363 introduction 331 menu commands 333 saving image 333 specifying color depth 363 toolbar buttons 333 whole word match 307 width table setting by percentage 379 setting by pixels 381 width work page customizing for user 265 word wrap 406 Word Microsoft editing in 313 editing XML documents 314 inserting from 421 uploading image from 314 work offline asset management system 245 250 work page size customizing for user 264 workarea accessing 13 button floating toolbar 5 definition 13 toolbar buttons 28 add 28 add calendar event 28 add content block 28 add content folder 28 add library items 28 add task 28 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 vi approvals 28 remove 30 removing 434 approve 28 reorder 30 value entering or modifying 435 approve all 28 restore 30 XML tags inserting 432 archived content 28 save 30 XML Web pages editing 429 calendar 29 search 30 XSLT removing from XML content check in 29 show calendar 30 block 98 check out 29 submit 30 collections 29 view date 31 y delete 29 view difference 31 delete content 29 view history 31 yellow
285. oval and publication It helps your organization set up a process for overseeing changes to a Web site indicate a content block s status within that lifecycle and inform the next approver that it is their turn to review a content block Editing a Content Block Finding a Content Block Much of your work involves editing existing content or creating new content Ektron CMS300 provides three methods for finding content to be updated You can use whichever method is easiest e Navigate through your Web site to the content block you want to edit e Find the content block through the Workarea which resembles Windows Explorer and lets you find a content block by navigating through a folder tree See Also The Workarea and Smart Desktop on page 13 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 5 Introduction to Ektron CMS300 e Use the Search button A which appears on many screens When clicked a screen prompts you to enter keywords and then finds content blocks containing the keywords The Editing Process After you find a content block click the Edit button L to open it in an editor Below is an example of a content block in the editor Edit Content Title y Triny irLine Fipe English U 5 4 Content Search Data Schedule d Lae Apple Style gt Normal Verdana 210 pt hi A da E f U A i e a T ae HOT NEW FEATURE Trinity In Line Pipe Trinitys new pipe and manifold are for rear
286. ow these steps 1 Navigate to the View Content page for the content block whose history you want to view 2 Click the View History button T Accessing the Content History from a Web page To access the view history for a content block from a Web page follow these steps 1 Browse to the content block whose history you want to view 2 Click the View History button E 3 The Content History window opens Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 95 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks The Content History Window Published Date 2o May 2004 03 51 PM P O3 Mar 27004 03 12 PM 03 Mar 2004 O3 12 PM P 03 Mar 2004 03 09 PM O3 Mar 2004 03 09 PM View Content History Private Content Content Title Private Content Content ID z Last User To Edit admin Last Edit Date 03 Mar 2004 03 12 PM Start Date None Specified End Date None Specified Date Created 21 Feb 2001 06 29 PM History Comment only users and member f member can see this content Metadata Title CMS300 Login Information Keywords login cms300 information Bob test This is default text Summary Content This is private content Only users and members that have read permissions c This Content History window has two sides e The left side the Document History area displays all versions of the content block Each version is identified by the date when it was published or checked in Some version
287. ox and insert the attribute Inserting a New Attribute To insert an attribute that does not appear in the Custom Tag Attributes dialog box follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 434 Editing XML Web Pages Click New 2 Anewline is added to the top of the Used Attributes column to make room for the new attribute 3 Enter the attribute into the new line circled in the illustration below Custom Tag Attributes E4 Offered Attributes OF Cancel i lt Add Renae lt 4 Press OK to close the dialog box and insert the attribute Entering or Modifying an Attribute Value To modify or enter an attribute value the attribute must be in the Used Attributes column To change or enter the value follow these steps 1 Click the attribute 2 Change or enter the text in the Value field circled in the illustration below Custom Tag Attributes Ea Used Attributes Offered Attributes nk Cancel Fresno Chicago 3 Press OK to close the dialog box and change the attribute value Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 435 Editing XML Web Pages The Insert Custom Tag Dialog Box Use this dialog box to insert a custom tag that may or may not be available at the cursor location according to the schema or DTD NOTE Because the Properties button on this dialog box is intended for developers it is not explained in this documentation The
288. page perform any action available Content to Expire Report The Content to Expire report lists all content blocks whose end date will occur within a number of days that you specify For example if today is January 1 and you select 10 days the report lists all content blocks whose end date is January 1 through January 10 After viewing the report you can click any content block and proceed to the View Content screen for it From there you can edit information about the content block including its end date if desired Selecting the Report s Date Range To select the report s date range you have two options Enter the number in the Days field Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 113 Content Workflow Reports Select a number from the dropdown that appears below the Days field After selecting a number of days click the view icon to see all content blocks that will expire within that time frame Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 114 Library Folder Library Folder The library folder stores images files quicklinks and hyperlinks that can be inserted into editor content Before you can insert them into content you must copy them from your computer to a larger file server computer that everyone editing your site can access This chapter explains how to copy such files and insert them into Web content through the following topics Terms Used in this Chapter on page 115
289. pears on every standard template supplied by Ektron has no effect on which content is searched Site Language English U5 English O S French Standard German Standard Last Editor s Last Name The last name surname of the user who most recently changed the content or form block Summary The content block summary See Also Adding a Content Block Summary on page 64 CMS Status The content block status See Also Appendix A Content Statuses on page 442 Note Although you can search for content blocks by any status when the search results appear and you click a content block to view it only the most recently published version appears If a version has never been approved nothing appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 52 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Search Data Fields search data fields are defined by your system administrator and applied to content by its author or editor They are custom defined so would be different for every site The search data fields in the sample illustration above are only an example of what they might look like Fields that Apply to MS Office Files Only Size of Document As displayed on the read only Size field on the File Properties window s General tab Number of pages As displayed on the read only Statistics Pages field on the File Properties window s Statistics tab Number of slides As displayed on the read only Statistics Slides
290. play you can 1 Place the cursor on the bar above the display of top level folders The bar has several dots in the middle Modules 2 Administrate 2 When the cursor turns to a double headed arrow drag it to the bottom bar Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 19 The Workarea and Smart Desktop To return the display to full buttons drag the same bar above Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea You can hide the left frame of the Workarea to provide more space for working in the right frame Below is an example of the Workarea with a minimized left frame Note that you cannot see the folder display in the left frame View Content abc test Ba We a D Be eb ee abe test oo Checked Out admin 1i May 2004 10 02 AM None Specified None Specified 1i May 2004 10 02 AM Approval Method Do Not Force All Approvers Approvals f iedit admin XML Configuration None Specified HTML Content 4ssumediinherited Path abe Content Searchable es History Comment To minimize the left frame click the white X near the top of the left frame The left frame remains minimized until you move the cursor to the left of the bar circled below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 20 The Workarea and Smart Desktop View Content abc test lontent Title abe test Content ID oo status Checked Out ast User To Edit admin ast Edit Date 11 May 2004 10 02 AM
291. ppears Before creating or translating a menu It s a good idea to create or translate all content blocks that will be on the menu In this way you can link these content blocks to the new menu However after creating a menu you can add new items to it Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 187 Working with Menus Translating a Menu To translate a menu into any supported language follow these steps You can navigate to the menu via the Web site or from the Workarea Each procedure is described below By Navigating the Site 1 Sign on to Ektron CMS300 and select the language in which the menu currently exists Navigate to the page that has the menu you want to translate Click the menu and the Edit Menu option 4 The View Menu screen appears for the selected menu 5 From the Add drop down list select the language into which you want to translate the menu Danish Lerman otandarc 6 The Add Menu screen appears Complete the screen for the menu in the selected language See Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 Click the Save button a 8 The View Menu screen reappears Now the View In drop down list displays the menu s new language Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 188 Working with Menus Yiew Menu Italian menu iew In italian standard Title Language ID URL Link hore Info 9 Add items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item
292. pprovals Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 77 Approving Declining Content Blocks 4 Click the content block you want to approve or decline I WOntact EKtron vey Sup Page Put Produc Page Put RC International Announces the RC Cheetah Del m Alaras PF armbar Er sF To select all displayed content blocks click Select All at the top of the screen mamas All Clear All Title W Contact Ektron W Support Page i Products Page M RC International Announces the RC Ct 5 The content block appears You can view the content summary search data etc A toolbar at the top of the screen lists tasks you can perform on the content B Publish Accept changes to the content block and publish it to the site Note If there is another approver in the approval chain for the content this is replaced by a SUBMIT button Decline Reject changes and keep current version of content block live on the Web site Check out content block and change it if desired View Published Toggle between the currently published version of content 7 Staged block and submitted version This can help you compare versions See Also Staged Content on page 449 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 78 Approving Declining Content Blocks a View Diff View differences between the version awaiting approval and the currently published content block See Also Comparing Versions of a Content Block on page
293. proval Select All Clear All Title Request Type Start Date Submitted by Path Contact Ektron Publish None Specified Administrator 4pplication C Support Page Publish None Specified Administrator Application Plastic Molder 123 Publish None Specified Administrator Application Human Re Approving Declining Content Blocks From the approvals report you can approve or decline content blocks that were submitted to you The steps below explain how to do so Approve Decline One Content Block 1 Access your Approvals report in the Workarea see Approvals Reports on page 105 2 Click the content block you want to approve or decline The View Content Awaiting Approval page is displayed 4 Perform an action using the following table as a reference Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 106 Content Workflow Reports By Publish Accept changes to content block and publish it to site Note If there is a subsequent approver in the content s approval chain this button is replaced by a Submit button Decline Reject changes and keep current version of content block live on Web site Check out content block and make changes to it if desired View Published Toggle between published and submitted versions of content Staged block This can help you compare differences Go back to previous screen Approving Multiple Content Blocks See Performing an Action on Several Content Blocks
294. proval with one click Archived Content If current content is being displayed switch to display archived content If archived content is being displayed switch to display current content See Also Setting Archive Options on page 61 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 28 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Name Description 0 Return to previous screen Calendar Lets you choose when content will go live See Also Working with Calendars on page 190 Cancel Cancels action you are performing without saving the information Check in Saves and checks in content block you are working on See Also Checked In Content on page 444 Check out Checks out a content block to edit prevents others from simultaneously working on it Checked Out Content on page 446 Collection Accesses the collection area for a content block lets you create edit and delete collections See Also The screen is refreshed and the folder is deleted on page 56 Declines an approval request submitted to you el Delete Content Deletes multiple content blocks at once Delete Folder Deletes current content folder Do Not Apply XSLT Removes XSLT applied to XML content viewed in the content history area Edits content or specific criteria in the Workarea Insert Library Item Inserts selected library item into your content block h See Also Library Folder on page 115 Ektron CMS300 User M
295. published on the Web site Currently being edited Has not been checked in Checked in for other users to edit Saved and submitted into the approval chain See Also Approving Declining Content Blocks on page 76 Requested for deletion Approved but the Go Live date hasn t occurred yet Task s assigned to content are not complete Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 More Information Active Content on page 443 Checked Out Content on page 446 Checked In Content on page 444 Submitted Content on page 446 Marked for Deletion Content on page 448 Pending Start Date Content on page 448 442 Appendix A Content Statuses More Information Content block was created with a future start date then checked in and deleted This status only remains until the start date is reached At that point the content block is deleted Active Content lf a content block has a green border it is live on the Web site Title Login ne Published bein will of Ch 200 is controlled trom this workarea To mas ee er ee ee A a ee Oe a et a ee SD i a e When content is active you can perform the following actions on it depending on your permissions The content block s status remains active until it is checked out and changes are made to it Description For more information see Edit Check out the content block to Editing a Content Blo
296. r Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 iii uploading 134 viewing 134 locking in position 283 moving to server 329 scanning 361 specifying color depth 363 indent toolbar option 280 insert custom tag dialog 436 insert library item toolbar button 29 insert table toolbar button 369 inserting cells 392 HTML 420 instant email see email instant Internet addresses spell checking 311 italic toolbar option 282 J jumps see bookmarks and hyperlinks justify toolbar option 281 L landing page after login customizing for user 265 language user editing 264 library accessing 116 add items button 28 asset adding as menu item 168 copying files to 120 definition 115 file extensions 118 file upload path 118 files editing 125 inserting into content 130 overwriting 126 viewing 123 folder properties 117 forms adding to content 135 viewing 136 hyperlinks adding 133 adding to content 134 editing 134 viewing 133 images adding to content 135 editing titles 134 extensions 118 overwriting 134 upload path 118 uploading 134 viewing 134 physical path 118 quicklinks adding to content 135 viewing 136 searching 119 license keys viewing 281 lifecycle content block 6 line WeblmageFX command 348 link check button 30 links broken finding 44 ListSummary compared with collection and menu 155 lock table or image in position 283 log in 8 log out 10 button floating toolbar 4 manuals online accessing 267 marked f
297. r hased snliitinns hiiciness See Also Example of an Approval Chain on page 79 Each option you may perform on a checked in content block is described below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 444 Appendix A Content Statuses Button f Name Description For more information see cy Edit Check out the content block to Editing a Content Block on change it page 40 cy Edit Summary Edit its summary Adding a Content Block Ey Summary on page 64 Edit Search Data Edit its search data Adding or Editing Search Data on page 68 BS Submit Publish Submit content block into approval chain If you are last approver in the approval chain the publish button appears If you click it the content is immediately posted to Web site Er View Staged View Staged button displays Staged Content on page 449 Ba z Published content that hasn t been published yet View Published button displays content live on the Web site i Delete Submit a request to delete the Example of an Approval Chain content into approval chain If on page 79 you are the last or only approver the content is immediately deleted Back Go to previous window sf Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 445 Appendix A Content Statuses Checked Out Content If a content block has a red border its status is checked out which means another user is editing it While in this status no other users
298. r more cells follow these steps Move the cursor to the first cell you want to delete 2 To delete only that cell proceed to the next step To delete several contiguous cells select them Contiguous cells can cross rows 3 Right click the mouse 4 Click Delete Cells from the menu Any cells to the right of the deleted cells shift left to occupy the vacant space In this example the cursor was in cell b when the user clicked on Delete Cells Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 393 Working with Table Cells Before setting a Cell s Border Color NOTE A cell border is the line that separates it from other cells By default the color of a cell s border matches the color of the table border However you can change the color of any cell border individually When viewed in Netscape Navigator cell borders are gray regardless of any change you make on the Cell Properties dialog box This example illustrates the effect of different cell border colors within a table ean Sets the color of the table be Sets the thickness of the tab Ere tha ceacines arain the If you want a cell s border to disappear set it to the same color as the table s background color To change the color of a cell s border follow these steps 1 Move the cursor to the cell and right click the mouse 2 Click Table from the menu 3 Click Cell Properties from the menu Ektron CMS300 User Manu
299. r option 280 button text displaying in title bar 265 buttons adding to menu 293 rearranging on menu 295 removing from menu 293 C calendars add event button 28 authorization for creating 192 button to display in Workarea 30 definition 190 event types 203 events adding 199 adding new content block for 205 assigning event types 203 button for viewing 31 deleting 211 display times 202 editing 209 insert hyperlink 202 location 202 recurring adding 203 start date 202 204 205 viewing 208 screen information on 194 viewing 197 cells background color 395 background image deleting 398 inserting 397 border color 394 invisible 394 deleting 393 inserting 392 merging 405 padding 407 spacing 407 splitting 404 text alignment 401 width 391 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 check in toolbar button 29 check out toolbar button 29 checked in content definition 444 report 107 checked out content definition 446 report 108 choose color WeblmageFX comm and 339 choose font WeblmageFX comm and 340 cleaning HTML 421 collaboration content 438 collections adding content 147 changing sequence of links 30 compared with menu and List Sum mary 155 creating 144 creating new content block for 149 default template 145 definition 138 deleting 152 editing content blocks 150 finding 139 folder using to find collection 141 information editing 152 multi language 153 removing content 150 reordering cont
300. rder around the picture Border Thickness For more information see Setting a Border on page 324 Adjust the alignment of the picture Alignment For more information see Aligning the Picture on page 325 WARNING If you substantially adjust the picture s height and or width the picture may be distorted when users view your Web page Pixels A pixel is a single point in a graphic image Computer monitors display pictures by dividing the screen into thousands of pixels arranged in rows and columns The pixels are so close together that they appear connected Below is an image shown at regular size and then enlarged so you can see the pixels that make up the picture Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 323 Inserting Images regular size enlarged to show pixels Setting a Border To add a border around a picture enter the border s thickness in pixels in the Border Thickness field on the Picture Properties dialog box Layout width fi E fi G Height Border Thickness p Alignment Not set T Reset Here is a picture with a 1 pixel border Here is the same picture with a 10 pixel senior Well lf the picture is not a hyperlink its border is black If the picture is also a hyperlink the border is the same color as a hyperlink for example blue or purple if visited Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 324 Inserting Images Aligning the Pictu
301. rds follow these steps 1 Select the text that you want to spell check 2 Press the manual spell check button 7 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 310 Checking Spelling 3 The spell checker reviews the words in the selected text and stops at any word not in the dictionary For documentation of options when a misspelled word is found see Ihe Spelling Dialog Box on page 310 4 When the spell checker finishes reviewing the words in the selected text it displays the following message Finished checking selection Do you want to check the rest of the document Click Yes to spell check the rest of the document including text above the selected text Click No to stop the spell checker setting Spell Check Options eWebEditPro XML can use Microsoft Word s spell checking feature your Webmaster makes this decision If your installation uses Word Word s Spelling amp Grammar window available from the Tools gt Options menu has settings that affect the operation of the spell check Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 311 Checking Spelling Options El Ei Track changes User Information Compatibility File Locations View General Edit Print Save Spelling amp Grammar Spelling I Hide spelling errors in this document ri Always suggest corrections Suggest from main dictionary only I Ignore words in UPPERCASE M Ignore words with numbers I Ignore In
302. re To align a picture use the Alignment field on the Picture Properties dialog box Layout width Height Border Thickness Alignment Reset When deciding how to align a picture you need to become familiar with these terms e baseline of text the imaginary line on which the text lies Some letters Such as g p and y have descenders segments of letters that extend below the baseline e bottom of text the lowest section of a line to which a descender extends e top of text the highest spot of a line to which any segment of a letter extends e vertical center the midpoint between the top and bottom of the line top vertical 5 OCCUPYING r bottom The following table lists your alignment choices Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 325 Inserting Images To align Click this in the Alignment field The picture on the left margin allowing Left subsequent text to wrap around it The picture on the right margin allowing subsequent text to wrap around it The top of the picture with the top of the Text Top Top text The vertical center of the picture with the baseline of the text The vertical center of the picture with the AbsMiddle vertical center of the text absmiddle The bottom of the picture with the Bottom Baseline baseline of the text This is the default alignment The bottom of the picture with the bottom AbsBottom of the text absbottom Resetting Width
303. re changes made to the image in WeblmageFX Return to eWebEditPro XML Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 346 Editing Images Freehand Standard Toolbar Button v Description Lets you draw a line in any shape that you want similar to using a pen on paper To use this command click the freehand command drag the line and release the mouse To change the line s size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Attributes Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size E e Highlight Cancel Horizontal Flip Standard Toolbar Button dk Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 347 Editing Images Description Reverses an image horizontally left to right Click this command again to reverse the image horizontally right to left Image before horizontal flip Image after horizontal flip Image Info Standard Toolbar Button i Description Displays information about an image e image name e height and width in pixels e bit depth See Also Specifying Color Depth on page 363 e file format Line Standard Toolbar Button Description Draw a straight line To change a line s size or color right click it after drawing it Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 348 Editing Images To use this command click the line command drag the line and release the mouse To change the lin
304. re one page at atime e Few digital cameras support twain Usually digital cameras resemble a hard drive or use proprietary software to extract images Ektron does not support an interface to proprietary software e Not all scanners support the twain standard Twain Source Standard Toolbar Button ae Description Lest you select a source for acquiring an image such as a scanner or digital camera See Also Twain Acquire on page 361 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 361 Editing Images Undo Standard Toolbar Button Description Reverses the most recent commands within the current editing session You can undo several commands at once by pressing the undo command repeatedly The first time you press the command the most recently completed command is undone The next time the second most recently completed command is undone etc See Also Redo on page 353 Vertical Flip Standard Toolbar Button iz Description Flips an image vertically top to bottom Click this command again to reverse the image vertically bottom to top A Image before vertical flip Image after vertical flip Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 362 Editing Images Zoom In Standard Toolbar Button Description Increases an image s magnification You can press this command several times to continue to increase magnification See Also Zoom Out on page 363 Reset Zoom Ratio
305. rea of an image use paste as new image to insert it into a new file Before creating a new file WeblmageFX asks if you want to save changes to current file Pointer Selection Standard Toolbar Button WS Description Click an annotation to select it After you select an annotation you can perform functions on it such as delete it Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 351 Editing Images This command is a toggle which means the the first time you click it itis on and the next time you click it it is off Polygon Standard Toolbar Button i Description Draws a polygon that is a closed figure surrounded by straight lines To use this command follow these steps 1 Click the polygon command 2 Drag the line in one direction as far as you want 3 Drag the line in the other directions to complete the polygon 4 Double click the mouse to terminate the polygon 5 To change the polygon s line size or color place the cursor on the line and press the right mouse button to display the Attributes menu Dialog Box Line Attributes Color Attributes Line Size 2 I Highlight Cancel Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 352 Editing Images Rectangle Standard Toolbar Button Description Draws a rectangle To use this command click the rectangle command drag a rectangle and release the mouse To change the rectangle s line size or color place the cursor on the line and
306. rea toolbar 28 one content block 77 several content blocks 79 approving content 76 from approval report 106 approving file asset management system 260 archived content toolbar button 28 archiving definition 61 options 61 restoring archived content 62 asset management system adding asset to collections 260 adding assets to menus 260 approving file 260 checking in document 244 creating managed file 252 creating Office document 240 editing managed file 257 editing Office document 250 exit without saving changes 245 file types 237 importing document 245 importing several documents 247 Office document properties editing 243 overview 236 reports of asset by status 260 saving recent changes 245 saving to local computer 245 security 239 submitting for publication 244 viewing documents in AMS 259 work offline 245 250 workflow 259 assign task button floating toolbar 4 auto hide feature of Smart Desktop 21 B background color applying to text 282 cell applying 395 deleting 396 removing from text 282 table applying 384 deleting 385 background image cell deleting 398 inserting 397 table deleting 387 inserting 386 bidirectional editing 283 blur WeblmageFX command 337 bold toolbar option 282 bookmarks 409 border image color 324 thickness 324 border color cell 394 content block meaning 442 table 387 border size cell 391 table 389 brightness WebImageFX command 338 broken links finding 44 bullet toolba
307. reen you do not have permission to do so To add a sub folder follow these steps 1 Navigate to and click the folder under which you want to create a sub folder D 292 168 0 272 CMs gt Content H5 Human Resour JA Marketinn The contents of the folder appear in the main section of the Workarea Click the Add Folder button 1A The Add Sub folder screen appears Enter the required information in the fields Use the following table to assist you Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 54 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Field Description O Enter a name for the sub folder Enter a full description of the folder Style Sheet Template XML Configuration Specify the style sheet that the content in the folder will use If left blank the folder inherits the style sheet from the parent folder Your system administrator should be able to assist you in choosing a style sheet Specify a default template in which to display the content blocks The default template is used when quicklinks are generated for the content in the content folder If left blank the template from the parent folder is inherited Your system administrator should be able to assist you in choosing a template By default content blocks and folders inherit their XML configuration settings from their parent folders To break or restore inheritance place or remove a check in the checkbox next to Inherit X
308. reen for the content block to which you want to attach in a task as described in Viewing a Content Block on page 33 2 Click the Add Task button LA 3 Follow the directions in Creating the Task via the Task Folder on page 215 The only differences are e the content block s ID number and title appear on the screen e the language of the content block is the default language Viewing a Task Once a task is added with the exception of Administrators only the user who assigned the task and those to whom the task was assigned can view tt To view a task follow these steps Viewing a Task from the Content Folder 1 Access the Contents folder from the left side of your Workarea 2 Select the content block associated with the task Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 224 Managing Tasks 3 Click the Tasks tab cy F y Properties Content Search Data Comment Tasks Content 4 The page lists all tasks assigned to the content block He r i W English H5 Ei aai 5 Select a task From the view task page you can add a comment to the task See Adding Comments to Tasks on page 230 for more information Viewing a Task from the Tasks Folder To view a task from the Tasks folder follow these steps From the Smart Desktop select the Tasks folder Using one of the options click the task you want to view The View Task screen is displayed From here you can per
309. rnationale Title gt lt meta name Keywords content RC International RC racing remote cont airplanes cars gt RC Intern ee RE Tink rel stylesheet href default css type text css gt to the spe ra Fi HEAD striving tc lt BoDyY topmargin 0 leftmargin 0 marginheight 0 marginwidth 0 For more information see Entering Title and Keywords on page 71 Entering Custom Search Data Your system administrator defines the search data that can be added to content When you create or update content and library items you can define search data using the fields that the administrator specified For example each document stored in your Asset Management system has a unique part number Your system administrator adds a custom search field called Part Number and specifies that only numbers can be inserted into the field When you add the document to Ektron CMS300 you access the content s search data and insert the correct part number for the document illustrated below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 69 Adding or Editing Search Data Title est word document English U 5 4 Summary Search Data Schedule Title Defaut current character count O 500 max Keywords Default current character count O 500 max Search Data City of origin No selection Part Number _Defauk Then anyone visiting your Web site can find that document by its part nu
310. roducts asp Last User To Edit 4oplication Administrator Last Edit Date 29 Oct 2002 09 36 PM Date Created 29 Oct 2002 09 34 PM Description Products navigation Include Subfolders Title ID Language ID URL Link El RC Sportster 4 1033 CMS300Sample products asp id 4 ERC Cheetah 5 1033 CMS300Sample products asp id 5 B FC Lilly 6 1033 CMS3005ample products asp 7id 6 El RC Redstar 7 1033 CMS300Sample products asp id The screen displays each item in the collection To learn more about a collection click More Info When you do the lower section Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 142 Working with Collections of the screen displays the following information about the collection e title e description e ID number e template e last user who edited it e last date when it was edited e date it was created e whether or not the content folder s sub folders can be included e for each content block in the collection a link to the block click this to view and edit the block ID number quickink Collections Toolbar The following table describes the collection toolbar buttons iM Add new collection or add items to a Creating a Collection collection on page 144 Remove Remove items from a collection Removing Content Blocks from the Collection on page 150 Reorder Reorder items in a collection Reordering Collections List on page 151 Edit Edit collection information E
311. ron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 390 Working with Table Cells Along with functions for managing tables described in Introduction to Tables on page 365 and Manipulating Your Table s Format on page 376 eWebEditPro XML also lets you perform actions on individual cells within a table You can perform the following actions on individual table cells e Specify a width e Insert or delete cells e Specify a border color e Specify a background color or image e Have a cell span two or more columns or rows e Specify horizontal and vertical alignment of the data within the cell e Split a cell into two cells e Merge two cells into one e Turn word wrap on or off e Set cell padding and spacing NOTE HTML does not allow you to adjust the width of a cell s border You can also select several cells or a row of cells and change them as described above However you cannot select and change a column of cells Specifying the Width of a Cell As described in Specifying Table Width on page 378 there are several ways to set the width of a table Within a table you can also specify the width of an individual cell Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 391 Working with Table Cells When you set a cell width there is no guarantee that the cell will occupy that width when displayed in a browser This is because the cell is part of a column and changes to other cells in the column
312. rs appear when you are not in site preview mode See Also Site Preview on page 10 Also your administrator can set up your system so that the borders always appear on a page instead of appearing only when you move the mouse over them Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 2 Introduction to Ektron CMS300 RG international Home Products Support News Careers Search Calendar Login Contact Lots of new features in Ektron CMS300 NEW FEATURE Trinity In Line Pipe NEW PRODUCT Introducing the RC Redstar Trinitys new pipe and manifold are for rear exhaust RC International is proud to introduce the RC engines and are now used in both the Sportster and Redstar This new addition to the RC International the cheetah Both the manifold and pipe are made fleet brings new options to our customers With from high quality aluminum This new pipe is more laser cut balsa wings and a wing span of 71 this is durable and will withstand a bad crash one plane that has to be seen The advantage of this feature is that you can see a Web page as it will appear to visitors to your site Continue editing until you are satisfied with its appearance To learn what the border color indicates see Appendix A Content Statuses on page 442 The Floating Toolbar When a content block s border is visible you can right click the mouse to display a floating toolbar an example is in the green box below NOTE Your ad
313. ry Task Type Start Date oOo Due Date oOo Description l 6 4 The Edit Task Type screen appears Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 222 Managing Tasks Edit Task Type Task Type Task Type Description Documents that need to be reviewed Task Type Availability Not Available From this screen you can edit the following e Task Type e Task Type Description e Task Type Availability See Also Task Type Availability on page 222 NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available see your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS300 Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 5 Edit the information 6 Click Save lm 7 The Task Type information is changed Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 223 Managing Tasks Creating a Task via a Content Block The above section describes assigning tasks from the Tasks folder You can also assign task via the content folder as illustrated below Yievw Content Contact Ektron u English U S Content Search Data Content a I Assigning a Task from the View Content Screen To assign a task from the View Content screen follow these steps 1 Access the View Content sc
314. s tf 24 bit 16M colors Cancel Contrast Standard Toolbar Button a Description Editing Images Increases or decreases an image s contrast that is the difference between light and dark areas of an image You can select a contrast level from 10 through 10 If you select an area of the image the command only changes that area Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 342 Editing Images Dialog Box w Contrast 0 me Copy Standard Toolbar Button Description Copies a selected area of an image After you copy an image you can paste it using the paste command See Also Paste as New Image on page 351 To select an area of an image use the Select command See Also Select on page 357 If you do not select an area the entire image is copied Create New Standard Toolbar Button D Description Lets you create a new image If you are editing an image when you press this command you are asked if you want to save changes to it first Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 343 Editing Images By default a new image s bit depth is 24 but you can change it if desired using the color depth command See Also Color Depth on page 341 Crop Standard Toolbar Button E Description Keeps selected area of an image removes everything outside that area To use the Crop command follow these steps 1 Select an area of an image that you want to
315. s a Content Block siscsvcscsssiccssiscistscssccsaxissiacscstsacessscncancasie 1 The Floating Toolbar oa see siseee eo tesesatnceesecetemantsecad saaenaadateceesendetacnseceneets 3 Workflow in Ektron CMS300 cccscccesecsssecenseensecenesenneneneseas 5 Editing a Content BIOCK cccccceeeeeeeneeceneeeenseseeseseeneeseneesens 5 The Lifecycle of a Content BIOCK ccccssesseceeneeeeseeeeeseeeneeees 6 LoggiNO in and QU seavacacacsanerviasaieebiasanvetantanicaspenessaathbaneneanes 8 EEr S ii a E EEES 8 Logging into the Sample Web Site ccccsssseesseneeeeeeneeseeneeees 8 SMe PTOI EW eee ee aai 10 Toggling Site Preview ccccceeccccseceeseeeeceeeeeceseeceeecesseeeesseeeesaeees 10 Logging Out of the Sample Site cssecesseeseeseeeeeeeeeees 11 The Workarea and Smart DeSKtop cssccessseeeeeeeeeees 13 Accessing the Workarea ccssssccseseesesseeseseeeeseeeeneeeneeesenseesaees 13 Understanding the Smart De SkKtop cccccsseseeeteseeeeneeeseenees 14 Navigating Within the Smart DeSktop ccccssseessssseeseeeees 17 Modify the Display of Top Level FolderS cc csssceecesseeeeseeeeees 18 Hide the Left Panel of the Workarea ccccscccseceeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeees 20 Sending Instant Email sanisccnswanssncsennmnarctenrenineorcnsssnneraesmmeimens 22 Conditions for Instant eMail ivvacvscuwiveimrvinnasciversvesswiversaidastennre
316. s available to yOu lf your Webmaster has given you access to all standard toolbar menus the menu looks like this Edit View As Paragraph Format Format Special Characters Form Elements Table Position Objects Text Direction Customize 5 Press the down arrow key to select the toolbar menu that has a button that you want to use Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 424 Section 508 Tables You cannot create Section 508 compliant tables using the standard Table Properties dialog box Specifically the dialog does not let you define a caption summary and table heading To define these elements needed for Section 508 compliant data tables use the Section 508 Table option of the Table menu illustrated below WARNING Section 508 Compliance 6 Anew menu appears listing all options on the selected menu The following menu displays what might appear if you select the Edit Menu Your Webmaster determines which menu options are available to you Cut Copy Paste Paste Text Replace Find Mest Pririt Undo Redo Check Spelling Check Spelling As fou Type Bookmark Hyperlink Remove Link HA Picture Table Edit in ord 7 Press the down arrow key until the desired option is highlighted Then click the option to perform the action The Section 508 Table Properties dialog only works with Internet Explorer version 5 0 or higher It does not work with Netscape
317. s display a green circle Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 96 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks Published Date 04 Dec 2003 10 20 AM 04 Dec 2003 10 20 AM 04 Dec 2003 09 45 AM O4 Dec 2003 09 44 AM O4 Dec 2003 09 44 AM 04 Dec 2003 09 44 AM A circle indicates a version that was published On dates without a green circle the content was checked in but not published e The right side has information about the selected version of the content block Viewing a Historical Version of a Content Block 1 Click a date from the left frame O2 Dec 2003 11 15 AM 04 Dec 2003 11 15 AM 01 Dec 2003 11 12AM obecioa 11 12 4M 01 Dec 2003 11 01 AM O ia E a a A a E a oe a a E Di LT rra 2 Information about that version of the content block appears on the right Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 97 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks View Content History Home Page Content Published Date Ge ral Fee 01 Dec 2003 11 15 AM 01 Dec 2003 11 15 AM 01 Dec 2003 11 12 AM 04 Dec 2003 11 12 am CONtent ID 1 B 01 Dec 2003 11 01 AM Content Status Published Oi Pec 200s iioi SM Last User To Edit E Application Administrator 2 eee ee Last Edit Date 01 Dec 2003 11 12 AM 26 Nov 2003 02 15 PM a 26 Nov 2003 02 14 pm Start Date None Specified 26 Moyv 2002 02 14 PM End Date None Specified 26 Hoy 2002 02 14 PM Date Created 21 Feb 2001 05 46 P
318. s width and page 373 alignment Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 370 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Table Properties Dialog Box The Insert Table dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a table s appearance Insert Table The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Field s Size Rows Columns Layout Width Layout Horizontal Alignment Lets you specify The number of rows and columns in the table Table width The table s alignment across the Web page Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 For more information see Choosing the Number of Rows and Columns on page 376 Specifying Table Width on page 378 Setting Horizontal Alignment on page 401 371 Field s Background Color Background Image Borders Use Default Color Border Color Cell Padding Cell Spacing Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Lets you specify The background color of the table A background image for the table Whether or not to use the default color gray for table borders If you do not use the default the color of the table border The size of the table border The space in pixels between the cell text and a cell s border The space in pixels between a cell and Surrounding cells Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 For more information
319. se click Select User or Group and choose a user or group When you complete the screen an email is sent to the selected user or user group informing him of the assigned task Note email is only sent to the user or user group if email notification is enabled for Ektron CMS300 Select the language of the user who will perform the task Content If this task involves a content block select it When you click Select a new window appears From this window you can navigate through folders to find the content block You can only select a content block whose language matches the user language selected above See Also Selecting a Content Block for the Task on page 218 Priority Select the priority of the task Your choices are High Normal and Low The priority appears on the View Tasks screen A user can sort tasks on the screen by priority Task Category Select a category for the task When a Task Category is chosen the Task Type drop down box is auto filled with task types associated with that category See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 220 Task Type Select the Task Type for this task You must specify a Task Category before you assign a task type See Also Adding a Task Category and Task Type on page 220 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 216 Managing Tasks By clicking the Add link you can add Task Categories and Task Types See Also Adding a Task Category and Task
320. see Specifying a Table s Background Color on page 384 Specifying a Background Image for a Table on page 386 Assigning Border Color on page 387 Assigning Border Size on page 389 Assigning Cell Padding on page 408 Assigning Cell Spacing on page 408 372 Table Dialog Boxes and Menus The Cell Properties Dialog Box The Cell Properties dialog box lets you manipulate most elements of a cells appearance Cell Properties The following table lists the fields on this dialog box and refers you to the section that explains each field Field s Rows Spanned Columns Spanned Lets you specify If the cell spans two or more rows If the cell soans two or more columns The minimum cell width Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 For more information see Spanning Rows or Columns on page 399 Spanning Rows or Columns on page 399 Specifying the Width of a Cell on page 391 373 Field s Word Wrap Horizontal Alignment Vertical Alignment Background Color Background Image Use Default Color Border Color Table Dialog Boxes and Menus Lets you specify Whether text moves down to the next line when it reaches the specified width of a cell The alignment of data across a cell The alignment of data up and down within a cell The cell s background color if you want it to be different from the tab
321. seeseeseesseseerenees 429 A Typical XML SG FSC areitecerdicocatreernnisvetimnancnsaaenwaniaanoninnniiorserds 429 Custom Tag Menu Options cccceceeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeseeseenees 431 inserting AML TIOS sei 432 The Custom Tag Attributes Dialog ccscseeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 433 The Insert Custom Tag Dialog BOX ssssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 436 Inserting a New Wat cuits gisececsactstmacsuseaoumeiasinid eo shnedgnoemestabehaerenateas 436 Inserting Comments Within Content cseccsesseesseneeseens 438 Adding Comments to Content cceeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeseeneenes 439 Viewing a COMTIIOI ecssiicstcesncesniwsnicenerenstecisuteracswentedeunsdessnnnses 440 Adding Another Comment cccscsescesseceeeseeceeneeseenseesenneeses 440 Updating a COMMING wcsicsiaiaseisncusardcessinuncavacawaieanaseviedeavaversdauseas 441 Appendix A Content Statuses ccsseceseeeeeeneeeeeees 442 PONV COKER sosssinieessipessnereoniomesiecanpmqeniniovesanemoucees 443 Checked In Content cccccecsecssseeceeseeceessescenseeeeenseesenneesensees 44A Checked Out Content cccccssseeccesseecesseecesseeeensseeeasessnenseees 446 Submitted Content sssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 446 Marked for Deletion Content c ccssseccsseseeseeceeeeeeseneeees 448 Pending Start Date Content cccccceesesseeceeseeseeneeseeeneeseees 448 SAHS CON
322. sert tags and right click the mouse the Insert Custom Tag option appears Insert HTML v View as WYSIWYG View as HTML Picture Insert Custom Tag Book Section Tag Attributes Book Section Tag Properties When you click Insert Custom Tag another menu appears The top of the menu may list tags that can be inserted at your cursor s location according to the XML schema or DTD being used A schema or DTD describes the hierarchy of tags in XML For example Author Book Title description Insert Custom Tag In the above illustration the first three menu options Author Book Title and Description are tags that can be inserted When you click a tag to insert it the Custom Tag Attributes dialog box appears For more information see The Custom Tag Attributes Dialog on page 433 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 432 Editing XML Web Pages After you finish working with the Custom Tag Attributes dialog box the selected tag is inserted at the location of the cursor Additional tags and or attributes may be inserted at the same time if your developer has set up the selected tag to do so You may also be able to insert a tag whether or not it can be inserted at the cursor location If you click Insert Custom Tag from the above menu and the following dialog box appears you can insert any tag on the list Insert Custom Tag Fa Cancel Knowledge Baze Article More Informa
323. steps 1 o U eS YP Follow the directions in Adding a Menu ltem via Content Folder on page 164 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 165 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 166 Click the radio button next to Library Asset option Click the Next button The Library screen opens Navigate to the folder whose assets you want to add In the right frame select the type of asset to insert image hyperlink etc NOTE To insert assets the menu s folder must contain library assets However you can insert library assets from other folders for which you have permission T 8 9 Select a library asset and click the Insert button i The Add New Item screen appears Use the following table to complete that screen ee Title of the Library asset When you insert the asset the title is used for the title of the menu item You can change it if needed Browse Library If you want to insert a different asset click the Browse Library button to browse the Library and select another asset Click the Save button H Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 168 Working with Menus Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu Item To add an external hyperlink as a menu item via a content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 oo 2S hb 6 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu ltem via Content Folder on page 164 Adding a Menu Item via Men
324. stify left and right justified To set horizontal justification of a table cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu ae W YS The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Horizontal Alignment field Cell Properties Span Rows S panned Columns Spanned Layout width alls iC Not Specified f Percent I Word Wrap Pixels Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 402 Working with Table Cells 6 Click your choice from the list and click OK Setting Vertical Alignment In the Cell Properties dialog box you can specify the vertical alignment of a cell You have four choices e top e middle e bottom e along the baseline of the first line of text the term baseline is defined in Aligning the Picture on page 325 This example illustrates the choices Top pm Bottom Baseline To set vertical justification for a table cell follow these steps Place the cursor in the cell that you want to edit Right click the mouse Click Table from the menu Click Cell Properties from the menu ae oN Ff The Cell Properties dialog box appears Click the down arrow to the right of the Vertical Alignment field Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 403 Working with Table Cells Cell Properties Spar
325. strates one of several screens that may appear in the Workarea Your system administrator determines which screen appears for you Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 13 The Workarea and Smart Desktop Smart Desktop for Application Administrator Co Smart Desktop a gt Tasks all Open Tasks Assigned To Me Assigned By Me Created By Me Zj Assigned To Use Not Started Tetive e Awaiting Data On Hold f Content Awaiting Approval 1 L Content Currently Checked Out 1 Tasks 2 fa Content To Expire 0 Closing the Workarea To close the Workarea click xj in the upper right corner of the window When you close the Workarea you return to the Ektron CMS300 view of your Web site You do not exit Ektron CMS300 Understanding the Smart Desktop The Smart Desktop is one of Ektron CMS300 s main screens To access it from wherever you are working in Ektron CMS300 click the button in the top left corner circled below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 14 The Workarea and Smart Desktop i 92 768 0 2 72 CME a4 Content The Smart Desktop consists of three sections illustrated below 1 x Smart Desktop for Application Administrator Smart Desktop 3 Tasks e All Open Tasks e Assigned To Me e Assigned By Me Created By Me Assigned To Use Sot Started Content Awaiting Approval 1 5 LY Content Currently
326. t folder to which the calendar is assigned Deleting a Single Occurrence Calendar Event You can easily delete calendar events that are no longer needed or do not belong to the calendar they were added to To delete a calendar event follow these steps 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 Click the event you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete button i A confirmation message appears Click OK o W e a Deleting a Recurring Calendar Event You can delete a single event in a recurring series or all events in the series Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 211 Working with Calendars Deleting a Single Recurring Event 1 rr e we Access the View Calendar Events screen for the date that contains the event you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 Click the event you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen appears Click the Delete Content button a A confirmation message appears Click OK Deleting All Events in a Recurring Series 1 Access the View Calendar Events screen for any date that contains an events in the series that you want to delete as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 Click the event in the series that you want to delete The Edit Calendar Event screen
327. t on an existing comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Comment window for the comment as described in Viewing a Comment on page 440 2 Insert the comment 3 Click the Insert button 4 The comment is saved and added to the top row of the comment table 5 Click the Close button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 440 Inserting Comments within Content Updating a Comment You can change a comment if needed To update a comment follow these steps 1 Access the View Comments window for the comment that needs to be updated 2 Click the Date Time link of the comment you want to edit Date Time Added By Comments now here s a comment on that cor Application a here s mY comment Adminstrator Zidek OS AM Comments Times Hew Roman 3 12 pt bi A Jl E 7 U BPE 3 The comment editor opens with the selected comment in it 4 Update the comment 5 Click the Update button to save the changes Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 Appendix A Content Statuses Appendix A Content Statuses The table below describes all possible content statuses The rest of this appendix explains each status in more detail Border Color Praa m _ o Submitted for Approval yellow yellow Marked for Deletion Pending Go Live Date Awaiting Completion of Associated Tasks Content state Through the workflow and
328. t the date and time when the content will become visible on the Web site i 09 15 am Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 58 Scheduling Content to Begin and End Click the Submit button The date and time appear in the Start Date field Start Date 14 Feb 2003 17 00 00 AM As an alternative you can enter the date and time directly without using the calendar If you do use the following format DD MMM YYYY hh mm ss tt NOTE When you select a time for content to go live that time depends on the server s system clock If the clock is incorrect the content will not go live at the intended time What Happens After Set a Start Date After you save the content block it appears on the Content Pending Start Date report which helps you keep track of content with a future start date See Also Content Pending Start Date Report on page 111 After you set a go live date and the content completes the approval chain two scenarios may occur e The content block is new e The content block already exists Each scenario is now explained Setting the Go Live Date on New Content When you set a go live date on a new content block the content becomes viewable on the specified date and time as long as it completes the approval chain If a user accesses the page that contains the content before then he sees only the template This occurs within Ektron CMS300 and when the content is viewed on the We
329. t the type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Menu item type For more information see Content blocks Adding a Content Block as a Menu Item on page 167 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 165 Working with Menus Menu item type For more information see Any library assets images files Adding a Library Asset as a Menu Item quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu on page 168 External hyperlinks Adding an External Hyperlink as a Menu ltem on page 169 Submenu to the main menu Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item on page 169 Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page 1 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears 4 Click Edit Menu 5 Inthe View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu Click the Add Item button Gp 7 The Add Menu screen displays a list of items you can add to the menu 8 Use to the table below to select the type of menu item and follow the steps to add that menu item Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 166 Assign this type of content to the menu Content blocks Any library assets images files quicklinks hyperlinks to the menu External hyperlinks Submenu to the main menu Working with Menus For details see Adding a Content Block as a Menu Item on page 167
330. t_Marual Tech Pubs det Documents and Settings rmspclrit Temp EktronD ew MSSOQL unzipped ewebeditpra My Music wl file drop Norton SystemVorks20071 v4 vbroker framemaker test portutility Wiewletb uildere Ej My Computer Jame 7 eee sue File name Lntitledt a nave as Ippe GIF Files gif Cancel My Network P My Documents ve NOTE The dialog box only appears the first time you save the image If you later want to save it to a different folder or under a different name or file type use the Save As command Save As Standard Toolbar Button Description Save the current image under a different name or format For example you might save mypicture gif as mypicture jpg Your system administrator determines which file formats are available Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 356 Editing Images Dialog Box See Save on page 355 Select Standard Toolbar Button p ti dant Description Selects an area of an image You can then execute other commands on the selected area such as blur sharpen cut and delete NOTE Once you press the Select command it remains selected and continues to be active until you press it a second time Sharpen Standard Toolbar Button A Description Sharpens edges within an image You can select a level of sharpness from 1 through 5 sharpening brings an image into better focus and increases the detail If you select an area of the
331. task type description e Define task type availability See Also Task Type Availability on page 222 NOTE As a user if you set the Task type to Not Available you cannot edit the Task Type after that To make the Task Type available See your administrator Task Type availability is explained in the Ektron CMS300 Administrators Manual gt Managing Tasks gt Task Categories and Types gt View Categorization Screen gt Task Type Availability 4 Enter your information 5 Click Save 6 Your new Task Category and Task Type appear in the drop down boxes Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 221 Managing Tasks Task Type Availability Task types can be hidden from users by clicking the Not Available check box in the Add Task Type and Edit Task Type screens By making Task Types not available you can make the Task Type unavailable without deleting it Editing a Task Type From the Add Task screen you can edit a Task Type This will allow you to change the Task Type name Task Type description and Task Type availability To edit a task type follow these steps 1 Go to the Add Task screen as described in Creating the Task via the Task Folder on page 215 2 Choose a Task Category and the Task Type to edit 3 Click the Edit link next to the Task Type drop down box Assigned To E jedit Select User or Group Language English U S Content Select Priority Task Catego
332. tent blocks in the selected folder that are not part of the collection Add items to Collection Support Packages Foldername Support Tithe Silver NOTE ID Date Modified 20 27 Oct 2003 06 45 PM 7 Check boxes next to content blocks to add to the collection You can only add content blocks in the selected folder or possibly its sub folders Sub folders are available if the Include subfolders field is checked for the collection If a collection includes sub folders you can add content blocks from the sub folders On the View Collection screen click a sub folder to view its content blocks Foldername Content D C O Syndication Contact Ektron 15 2 Login Information 2 2 To return to the parent folder click the folder with the up arrow 8 Check boxes next to content blocks that you want to add to the collection If you select a content block from a sub folder click the add button to add the selected content to the collection Navigating between sub folders deselects content blocks Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 148 Working with Collections 9 Click the Add button 52 Creating a New Content Block for a Collection You can create a new content block while adding content block links to a collection To add a content block follow these steps 1 Access the View Collections screen for the content folder in which you want to add the collection as des
333. ternet and file addresses Custom dictionary cusTOM DIC Dictionaries Grammar check grammar as you type Writing style Y Hide grammatical errors in this document Technical T check grammar with spelling Show readability statistics settings Recheck Document Specifically you can set the spell check feature to check or ignore e words in UPPERCASE for example XYLOGIC e words with numbers for example mp3 e Internet and file addresses for example nttp www ektron con As an example if you check the box to the left of Ignore Words in UPPERCASE eWebEditPro XML s spell check does not consider words in all uppercase characters You also use the custom dictionary section of the screen to identify custom dictionaries for the spell check to reference The spell check feature does not use the other fields on this screen Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 312 Editing in Microsoft Word If your computer has Microsoft Word 2000 or greater you can edit content within Word You may prefer to do this because of familiarity with Word s user interface and to use additional functionality available in Word NOTE Some Word formatting may not be compatible with HTML and as a result not be transferred to eWebEditPro XML To edit with Word follow these steps 1 Open eWebEditPro XML Press the Word toolbar button E The following dialog may appear warning you th
334. th is relative to the site CMS300Sample UploadedFiles Physical Path cINetoub way wrootcels s00Sample uploadedFiles Verified 3 The library properties screen displays the following settings Field Description Image Extensions File extensions of images that can be copied to this library folder For example gif and jpg Image Upload Path Server location to which images are copied Physical Path The physical path on the file server where uploaded images are stored Verified A green check notifies you that the physical location exists A red X means that the location does not exist and your administrator needs to set up that folder on the file server File Extensions Extensions of files that can be copied to this library folder For example doc and pdf File Upload Path Server location to which files are copied Physical Path The physical path on the file server where uploaded images are stored Verified A green check notifies you that the physical location exists A red X means that the location does not exist and your administrator needs to set up that folder on the file server Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 118 Library Folder Your system administrator controls these settings searching the Library You can search the library for items The search helps find an item when you only know some information about it For example you know that an image s name includes E
335. the illustration above if the user moves the cursor over Products the assigned menu appears However if the user clicks Products as indicated by the hand he jumps to CMS400Example products aspx Entering the Path to the Landing Page This path must be relative For example 300Sample index aspx This URL path can be a static template path like the one mentioned above or a dynamic path such as 300Sample index aspx id 25 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 162 Working with Menus Field Description eee Note This field applies to content blocks only It has no effect on other types of menu items Such as images If you want to apply a template to this menu enter the template here If you do all content blocks on this menu use this template when selected from the menu If you do not enter a template here the content blocks on this menu use the template specified in their quicklink Overriding the Template Link You can override the menu template for any content block on this menu and instead use the template specified in its quicklink To do so follow these steps 1 Add all items to the menu See Adding a Menu Item on page 164 Go to the View Menus option Click More Info Click the menu item you want to change At the Link field change the value from Menu Template to Quicklink Link OuickLink Menu Template Important If you created menus prior to upgrading to
336. this License Should CUSTOMER breach any of its obligations hereunder CUSTOMER agrees to return all copies of the Software and this License upon notification and demand by Ektron 3 Copyright The Software including any images applets photographs animations video audio music and text incorporated into the Software as well as any accompanying written materials the Documentation is owned by Ektron or its suppliers is protected by United States copyright laws and international treaties and contains confidential information and trade secrets CUSTOMER agrees to protect the confidentiality of the Software and Documentation CUSTOMER agrees that it will not provide a copy of this Software or Documentation nor divulge any proprietary information of Ektron to any person other than its employees without the prior consent of Ektron CUSTOMER shall use its best efforts to see that any user of the Software licensed hereunder complies with this license 4 Limited Warranty Ektron warrants solely that the medium upon which the Software is delivered will be free from defects in material and workmanship under normal proper and intended usage for a period of three 3 months from the date of receipt Ektron does not warrant the use of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free nor that program errors will be corrected This limited warranty shall not apply to any error or failure resulting from i machine error ii Customer s failure to
337. this version of Ektron CMS300 those menu items are assigned as quicklinks You cannot change them to template links simply by entering a template link here Instead you must go to each menu item and change the Link field value from QuickLink to Menu Template as illustrated above Add a more detailed description for the menu 6 Click the Save button E With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 164 Adding a Menu via the Menus Module See Also Adding a New Menu on page 160 Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 163 Working with Menus 1 From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus 2 Click the Add Menu button cp 3 The Add Menu screen appears Add Menu Title English US4 URL Link CMS300Sample Select Page The URL link will associate the menu title with a landing page Template cms3cosample Link Leave the above template empty if you wish to use the Quicklinks Description 4 To complete the fields on the Add Menu screen see Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 With the menu added you may assign menu items to it See Adding a Menu Item on page 164 Adding a Menu Item Similar to being able to add edit view or delete a menu Ektron CMS300 also allows you to add edit view and delete a menu item to a menu See Also The Structure of Menus and Menu Items on page 158
338. tion References Resolution Summary Symptoms This article applies to Title The Custom Tag Attributes Dialog XML tags can have attributes which are used to further define an XML tag For example in which importance is the attribute lt element importance high gt Text lt element gt The Custom Tag Attributes dialog box appears when you e insert a new tag or e place the cursor in an XML tag that does not show attributes right click the mouse and choose Custom Tag Attributes from the menu The dialog box allows you to e view attributes that are assigned and that can be inserted e remove assigned attributes Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 433 Editing XML Web Pages e add available attributes e add new attributes e enter or modify an attribute s value Custom Tag Attributes Ea Used Attributes Offered Attributes TE note i New i id visible ee 4 Add Remove gt Fresno Boston Dallas Chicago Removing an Attribute To remove an assigned attribute follow these steps Click the attribute within the Used Attributes column Click Remove gt Press OK to close the dialog box and remove the selected attribute Inserting an Available Attribute To insert an attribute that can be inserted at the cursor location follow these steps 1 Click the attribute from the Offered Attributes column 2 Click lt Add 3 Press OK to close the dialog b
339. tions View Collections in Folder Human Resources Title ID Date Modified UEL Link 2 Main Jobs listing 04 Nov 2002 03 36 PM CMS300Sample hr asp Click the Add button 5 5 The Add Collection screen appears Title New Collection Template cMms3005ample index asp Leave the above template empty if you wish to use the Quicklinks Description New collection with various content blocks M Include Subfolders 6 Complete the screen using the following table Field Deseription Title Assign a unique title to the collection Template Enter the default template for the collection This template is used to display the content of the links generated if no template is assigned in the custom function If left blank the links use their respective quicklinks See Also Default Template vs Quicklinks on page 146 Description Add a more detailed description for the collection Include Sub folders Check if you want to add to the collection content blocks in sub folders of the content folder 7 Click the Save button m Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 145 Working with Collections You can now assign content blocks to the collection See Assigning Content Blocks to the Collection on page 147 Default Template vs Quicklinks You can specify a template that determines the screen display for a collection when it is published on a Web page See your system administrator for i
340. tle Add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable Content Metadata Schedule Co Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 47 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Specifying the Search Word or Phrase In the text field enter one or more words that you want to find within the selected file types The search uses these words to find and return content Entering one or more words here is optional That is you can use fields on the lower portion of the screen to find content without knowing any words contained in the assets For example you can find every HTML content block that was modified by a certain user within the last 30 days If you check off HTML and Form content you can enter no search criteria and get a list of all HTML and Form content blocks on your site IMPORTANT The asset search requires at least one criterion As examples you could enter text into the Search Text field some characters contained in the Title or a minimum Document Size of 1000 kilobytes See Also e The Noise Files on page 48 Specifying Match Criteria on page 49 e Search Data on page 50 e Tips on Responding to Search Criteria Fields on page 53 The Noise Files If you are searching for assets Windows has a noise file that screens from the search every single letter of the alphabet as well as common words Examples of common words are about after all and also Avoid entering such words into t
341. to this event click an Event Type from the right column Then click the Right Arrow R to move the event type to the Selected column Repeat for each event type you want to assign to the event For information about adding a new content block while adding a calendar event see Adding a New Content Block for a Calendar Event on page 205 6 Click Save E Understanding Event Types Your system administrator can set up types of calendar events For a personal or workgroup calendar examples might be staff meetings employment interviews conference calls For an educational institution examples might be academic deadlines sporting events and tuition due dates If you assign a type to an event while creating it you can later display only events of that type This feature lets the viewer temporarily suppress unwanted events As a result the calendar display is cleaner because it only shows relevant information Adding a Recurring Event You can assign an event to occur multiple times on a calendar To do so follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 203 Working with Calendars 1 Adda calendar event as described in Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 2 Click the Recurring tab to assign the event for more than one day Add Calendar Event Event Title Company Meeting Event Location New ork Conference room Qne Time Recurring Start 7 Apr 2005 pr
342. tron CMS300 content you can insert comments to the content Comments might be an author s note to himself or other authors about the content block For example you could insert a comment explaining why you are using a certain style class Comments are only visible during editing they do not appear when the content is published on your Web site 2 Headquarters 5 Northern Blvd Bldg 6 Amherst WH 03031 USA Tel 1 603 594 0249 Fax 1 603 594 0258 tton onk Ektron CMS Comments Microsoft Internet Explorer zuropear Comments 312 pt B Bom ye Yedia Co Torn Please review the text to verify accuracy g Bill aoa ut E j Done loading pee ER pg F Internet a Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 438 Inserting Comments within Content Other users can add comments to your comments This feature is know as Content Collaboration Similar to other word processing programs comments can be added updated and tracked to audit changes being made This section explains the content collaboration feature WARNING Do not confuse these comments which are inserted within the content with history comments which are inserted outside the content and used to indicate what changed during an editing session Adding Comments to Content To add a comment to a content block follow these steps 1 Create a new content block or edit an existing one See Also Add
343. ts appearance In Preview mode click the Preview button to switch to regular mode Regular View The most recently published versions of content blocks appear In this mode colored borders surround content blocks when you move the cursor over them In regular view click the Preview button to switch to preview mode Toggling Site Preview To toggle site preview on and off follow these steps Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 10 Logging In and Out 1 Navigate to a page that includes the login logout button Logout Workarea Preview 2 Click the Preview button Preview 3 The Web site is now in preview mode RC international Home Products Support Hews Careers Search Calendar Login Logging into CMS300 is easy Simply click on the Login button below A pop up window will appear Use Username adhan and the password admin This login will allow you to browse through the administrator s All the functionality of CMS300 is controlled fram this workarea NOTE The Ektron CMS300 sample site has 3 content sections that use XML RC Cars RC Planes Human Resources After logging in please use the site navigation or the following links to see ho is to work with XML within CMS300 Products Careers For a complete introduction to the administrator s workarea please refer to the CMS300 Administrator Gui Logout 4 To turn preview mode off click the XPreview butto
344. u via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 171 Editing a Menu on page 172 Editing a Menu Item on page 173 Editing Types of Menu Items on page 176 Viewing a Menu on page 179 Reordering Menu Items on page 184 Deleting a Menu on page 185 Deleting a Menu Item on page 186 Working with Menus in a Multi Language System on page 187 Adding a New Menu You can add a new menu by navigating to the folder that contains its content blocks or by choosing Modules gt Menus from the left frame of the Workarea If you choose Modules gt Menus Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 160 Working with Menus you cannot select the menu s language it assumes the current language In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder you can select a language during the menu creation process you cannot select the menu s folder it is automatically assigned to the root folder In contrast if you create a menu after choosing a content folder you select a folder while creating the menu Adding a Menu via Content Folder Add Menu 1 oo a SS w Navigate to the content folder that contains the content blocks you want to display on the menu The content blocks can reside in the selected folder or any of its subfolders In the View Language dropdown list select the language of the menu you want to create Click the View Menus button The View All Menus scr
345. us Module on page 165 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 166 Click the circle next to External Hyperlink Click the Next button The Add New Item screen is displayed Complete the fields as needed Field Deseripton Title Title of the new external hyperlink menu item URL Link The URL link for the external hyperlink For example www google com Click the Save button E NOTE When adding an External Hyperlink menu item the URL does not get added to the library nor is an ID assigned to it So when you save the menu item it is not added to the CMS database nor can it be retrieved for future use Adding a Submenu as a Menu Item To add a submenu as a menu item via content folder or menus module follow these steps 1 Follow the directions in Adding a Menu Item via Content Folder on page 164 Adding a Menu Item via Menus Module on page 165 or Adding a Menu Item via Navigation Link on a Web Page on page 166 Click the radio button next to Submenu The Add Menu screen is displayed Complete the fields using Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 as a reference Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 169 Working with Menus 5 Click the Save button E Adding an Item to a Submenu From the left frame of the Workarea click Modules gt Menus Select the menu 3 Find the submenu to which you want to add items Submenus have a fol
346. utton 1 A confirmation message is displayed 4 Click OK NOTE Deleting a menu automatically deletes all menu items associated with it Do not confuse however the menu link with the item itself For example deleting a menu deletes its inks to content blocks but has no affect on the content blocks Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 185 Working with Menus Deleting a Submenu 1 Access the View Menu page as described in Viewing a Menu via the Menus Module on page 183 Select the submenu Click the delete icon to the right of the submenu Surrounded in red below view Menu my new menu submenu for my new menu amp B m add a submenu to the submenu amp B m TMy new submenu B Blm lore Info Deleting a Menu Item Similar to editing and viewing a menu you can remove a menu item from a menu via e its content folder e its menu folder Removing a Menu Item via its Content Folder You can delete any menu item by clicking the accompanying Delete icon j on the View menu screen Alternatively you can follow these steps The procedure below is quicker if you are deleting several or all items at once 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 180 2 Click the menu you want to delete 3 The View Menu screen for that menu is displayed 4 Click the Remove button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revisi
347. ve larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 Display button text in Check this box if you want any button s caption text to the title bar appear in the screen title s bar whenever a user moves the mouse over the button Note the word Update describing the button in the illustration below If you do not check this box the screen s title remains in the title bar when the user moves the mouse over the button as illustrated below Edit User jedit Landing Page after If you want one page in your Web site to appear after login sign in enter the URL to that page You might select a page that leads to a group of pages that you maintain If you don t know the URL navigate to the page go to the browser address bar and select the text following the directory in which Ektron CMS300 resides For example if the browser address bar says http www ektron com customers aspx id 945 you would enter customers aspx id 945 here Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 265 Updating Your User Profile e ee Set smart desktop as If you want the Smart Desktop to appear as soon as you the start location in the enter the Workarea click inside this check box Workarea See Also Understanding the Smart Desktop on page 14 If you leave this check box blank when you enter the Workarea you go to the folder of the content block specified at the Landing Page after login field Inher
348. w on page 411 If you leave the Target Frame field blank the new window replaces the current window 10 Click OK Changing the Destination Window While defining hypertext you can use the Target Frame field on the Hyperlink dialog box to change the window in which the destination page appears Same Window _self Parent Window parent select Browser Window bop Si a Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 411 Using Bookmarks The possible values that you can enter into the Target Frame field are explained below If you want the destination page to appear Click this in the Target Frame field In a new browser window on top of the current New Window _blank browser In the same position within the browser window Same Window _self The new window replaces the current one Note this is the default If your page contains frames in the frame that Parent Window _parent contains the frame with the hyperlink If your page contains frames in the full display Browser Window _top area replacing the frames If your page contains frames in the frame with the Enter the name of the frame specified name Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 412 Using Hyperlinks Use hyperlinks to let a user jump from any word phrase or image to another Web page The page can be within your network that is on an intranet or anywhere on the internet NOTE If you want to creat
349. w next to the add dropdown list to view a list of items you can add 5 Select Office Documents 6 Click the Add Several Files button f Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 247 Using the Asset Management System View Contents of Folder Content HTML Content Ud MAIC ONENE Language ID Status Date Modifier CMT CE D ocuments SSS a eS SS M eee TEI ee 1043 15 I 26 May 2004 MNRE ES 1033 24 A 04 Dec 2003 Home Page Content 1033 1 5 04 Dec 7003 7 The View Contents of Folder screen splits into two sections resembling Windows Explorer The left section displays the folder structure of your PC and its network drives The right section displays the files in the selected folder lyh tl English fU 5 4 Wo add to Quicklinks table Content Searchable zontent Summary Search Data Data Schedule Comment Bay My Documents Modified ao 0400 doc 21 K6 Microsoft Word Document 1119 20 pret T O la AssetData xml 52KB XML File 3 11 20 H E i ne Sepa OF calendar day wording doc 21 KB Microsoft Word Document 413 200 l EE a E M era RE O aendar Observations dac SO KB Microsoft Word Document 3 31 20 a ETE a ak Places Oe BMS documentation topics doc S31 KB Microsoft Word Document 1 26 20 T a Recycle Bin Oe Extend Menu Feature doc 29 Microsoft Word Document Sf 15 200 aod absence reporting Oe menu suggestions dor 30 KE Microsoft Word Document 12
350. w content block to a menu via a navigation link on a Web page follow these steps 1 Access the Web page that contains the link to display the menu 2 Place the mouse on the hyperlink that causes the menu to appear 3 The menu appears 4 Click Add Content NOTE The Add Content option lets you add only a new content block to a menu You cannot add another type of menu item using this button Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 171 Working with Menus 5 A screen displays the name of the current folder and its subfolders To create the new content in the current folder click Next To create it in subfolder click it 6 The Add Content screen opens allowing you to enter information Enter all information in the Add Content screen and click the Publish button See Also Adding a Content Block on page 37 7 The content block is added to the menu Editing a Menu You can edit a menu via e its content folder e menus module e navigation link on a Web page This section describes each option Editing a Menu via its Content Folder To edit a menu from a content folder follow these steps 1 Access the View Menu screen as described in View a Menu via its Content Folder on page 180 Click the Edit button The Edit Menu screen is displayed 4 As necessary change the fields in Edit Menu screen by referencing Fields on the Add Edit Menu Screen on page 162 5 Cli
351. wever the next time you log in you must use the new password Confirm Pwd Confirm your new password by retyping it into this field User Language Select a language in which to view Ektron CMS300 Click the black down arrow on the right circled below to see a list of choices Email Address Enter a new valid email address Notification emails are sent to this email address unless the Disable E mail Notification field is checked To understand how email notification operates within the content workflow see Example of an Approval Chain on page 79 Also this address identifies the user sending Instant email See Also Sending Instant Email on page 22 Disable Email Check this box if you do not want to receive notification Notification emails Work Page Size Your system administrator may let you change the work page values If he does the following fields are editable Otherwise you can only view the fields Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 264 Updating Your User Profile ed Pesetton If desired change the width of the screen in which Ektron CMS300 appears The width in pixels must be between 400 and 2400 This field accommodates users who have larger monitors and or prefer a smaller resolution such as 1280 x 1024 If desired you can change the height of the screen in which Ektron CMS300 appears The height in pixels must be between 300 and 1800 This field accommodates users who ha
352. with your questions and feedharck ahmut Fltran s Wah cantent anthnaringn and mananeament Click the down arrow p to return the content area to normal size The tooltips bar and toolbar also return to the screen Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 43 Working with Folders and Content Blocks Deleting a Content Block NOTE The ability to delete a content block is a privilege granted by the system administrator If you do not see a Delete button i on the View Content History screen you do not have permission to do so The Delete command lets you permanently delete obsolete content blocks from your Web site Like publishing a deleted content block must go through the approval chain before it is removed You can only delete a content block if its status is Checked In or Approved To delete a content block follow these steps 1 Access the View Content screen for the content block you want to delete as described in Viewing a Content Block on page 33 2 Click the Delete button 1 3 The following message appears 9 Are you sure vou wish bo submit this content block to the approvers For deletion 2 This content will be deleted once the entire list of approvers has approved this request This action will also delete any library quicklinks associated with the content block Continue Cancel 4 Click OK to delete the content block When the content block goes through the approval cha
353. x appears This box and lets you insert a picture from your computer and any network folder available to your computer or from the Web server Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 317 Inserting Images to which your computer is connected Both choices are described below Insert Media Item Microsoft Internet Explorer Inserting a Picture from the Server The top left corner of the dialog box Illustrated below lists the pictures on the Web server 8 Insert Media Item Microsof Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 318 Inserting Images Pictures that you previously inserted appear on this list as do pictures inserted by other users connected to that server To insert a picture from the server follow these steps 1 Click the picture from the To Select an Existing File field that you want to insert 2 Information about the picture s file size width and height appears in the upper right corner of the dialog box 3 If you want to view a picture before inserting it click Preview on the right side of the dialog box Click OK The Picture Properties dialog box reappears Here you can change the properties of the picture For more information see e Adjusting a Picture on page 322 e Setting a Border on page 324 e Aligning the Picture on page 325 e Adding Space around the Picture on page 327 6 Click OK to insert the picture into the editor De
354. xplains the screens menus and dialog boxes that you will likely encounter when working with eWebEditPro XML This section describes the following topics e A Typical XML Screen e Custom Tag Menu Options e Inserting XML Tags e The Custom Tag Attributes Dialog e The Insert Custom Tag Dialog Box A Typical XML Screen The following screen a sample that Ektron provides with eWebEditPro XML has features that may appear within your browser The screen consists of XML tags and fields into which you can insert tag values Tags are elements that collect XML content such as Author and Book Title in the screen below Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 429 Editing XML Web Pages S BM8 g ooye eeel aama I Bi pple Style Normal Times New Roman 3 12 pt ud A A B i II ut a n i Wt I hll w il q I nbsp x catalog Book Section note Ghost writer involved idifbk101 city Fresno IY visible Author M enabled Id city Boston localeRef req Same other default text Status student Book Title M enabled localeRef Types of Tags Here is some information about the types of tags that can appear on an eWebEditPro XML screen e Some tags accept text such as note Ghost adaki e Some tags accept a check mark if the condition is true and no check mark if it is false For example M visible Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8
355. y Monday Tuesday wednesday Friday Saturday JAA RC International Hosts RC Conference Location testing Jedit Stare 3 00 PM 6 00 FP fae RC International Ships RC Sportster Location Chicago Start 12 00 AM End 12 00 4M 2g on staff meeting Location Mew York d appt company meeting Filter By Event Type All Event Types The Calendar Feature is explained through the following topics e Understanding Calendars on page 191 e Accessing the View Calendar Screen on page 193 e Viewing a Calendar on page 197 e Adding a Calendar Event on page 199 e Adding a New Content Block for a Calendar Event on page 205 e Viewing a Calendar Event on page 208 e Editing Calendar Events on page 209 e Deleting Calendar Events on page 211 Understanding Calendars Before working with calendars you should understand the following points Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 191 Working with Calendars e Ektron CMS300 supports several calendars at one time There might be a site wide calendar and other calendars for special interests such as an athletic events calendar e A calendar displays one month at atime Each date can display several events e Only system administrators can create a calendar e Each calendar is assigned to a content folder See Also Working with Folders and Content Blocks on page 26 Your ability to view add edit an
356. y and maximizes the page for efficiency As a result the page should be error free and load more quickly in a browser Also the appearance of clean HTML is more consistent when viewed in different browsers To clean your HTML follow these steps 1 Right click the mouse 2 Click Clean Source from the menu 3 eWebEditPro XML cleans your Web page s HTML content Inserting Content from MS Office 2000 If you paste text into eWebEditPro XML from a Microsoft Office 2000 application such as Microsoft Word the following window appears ca HTML code generated by Office 2000 has been detected 7 There iz excessive HTML code that may prevent you from changing text format fou may clean the HTML code later by right clicking and selecting Clean HTML Code Do you want to clean the HTML code now For best results click Yes Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 421 section 508 Compliance This section explains how eWebEditPro XML complies with Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act a law enacted by the United States government that requires Federal agencies to make their electronic and information technology accessible to people with disabilities Specifically this section explains how to e move the cursor into the eWebEditPro XML editor e use eWebEditPro XML without a mouse e work with Section 508 tables Moving the Cursor into eWebEditPro XML Using Internet Explorer If the eWebEditPro XML
357. y in delivered code form Each copy of the Software is licensed for use only on a single URL Each license is valid for the number of seats listed below the Basic Package Any use of the Software beyond the number of authorized seats contained in the Basic Package without paying additional license fees as provided herein shall cause this license to terminate Should CUSTOMER wish to add seats beyond the seats licensed in the Basic Package the CUSTOMER may add seats on a block basis at the then current price for additional seats see product pages for current price The Basic Packages are as follows Ektron CMS100 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS200 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS300 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron CMS400 NET Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron DMS400 Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL Ektron eWebEditPro XML Licensed for ten seats 10 named users per URL For purposes of this section the term seat shall mean an individual user provided access to the capabilities of the Software The CUSTOMER may not modify alter reverse engineer disassemble or decompile the Software This software product is licensed not sold 2 Duration This License shall continue so long as CUSTOMER uses the Software in compliance with
358. y vary according to your permissions and the status of the content block NOTE Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 34 Button or Tab Search Data View Content Block Edit Summary Edit Search Data Content Properties View Comment Edit Content Block View History View Staged View Difference Move Content Working with Folders and Content Blocks Description Displays content block Edit content block s summary Edit content block s Search Data View the content block s properties View comments on changes made when editing a content block The history comment also appears on the View Content and Content History screens Open content block for editing View all available older versions of the content block restore older version Displays staged content Compares current version with earlier version of content Delete content block Move content block to another folder Ektron CMS300 User Manual Version 4 8 Revision 7 For more information see Adding a Content Block Summary on page 64 Adding or Editing Search Data on page 68 Properties on page 36 Editing a Content Block on page 40 Viewing and Restoring Previous Content Blocks on page 94 Staged Content on page 449 Comparing Versions of a Content Block on page 87 Deleting a Content Block on page 44 This button is only available to administrators To learn

Ektron CMS300 User Manual - Ektron Product Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents